Coverage Report

Created: 2026-10-17 06:10

next uncovered line (L), next uncovered region (R), next uncovered branch (B)
/work/mbedtls-3.6.6/include/mbedtls/ssl.h
Line
Count
Source
1
/**
2
 * \file ssl.h
3
 *
4
 * \brief SSL/TLS functions.
5
 */
6
/*
7
 *  Copyright The Mbed TLS Contributors
8
 *  SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0 OR GPL-2.0-or-later
9
 */
10
#ifndef MBEDTLS_SSL_H
11
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_H
12
#include "mbedtls/platform_util.h"
13
#include "mbedtls/private_access.h"
14
15
#include "mbedtls/build_info.h"
16
17
#include "mbedtls/bignum.h"
18
#include "mbedtls/ecp.h"
19
20
#include "mbedtls/ssl_ciphersuites.h"
21
22
#if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C)
23
#include "mbedtls/x509_crt.h"
24
#include "mbedtls/x509_crl.h"
25
#endif
26
27
#if defined(MBEDTLS_DHM_C)
28
#include "mbedtls/dhm.h"
29
#endif
30
31
#include "mbedtls/md.h"
32
33
#if defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_SOME_ECDH_OR_ECDHE_ANY_ENABLED)
34
#include "mbedtls/ecdh.h"
35
#endif
36
37
#if defined(MBEDTLS_HAVE_TIME)
38
#include "mbedtls/platform_time.h"
39
#endif
40
41
#include "psa/crypto.h"
42
43
/*
44
 * SSL Error codes
45
 */
46
/** A cryptographic operation is in progress. Try again later. */
47
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CRYPTO_IN_PROGRESS                -0x7000
48
/** The requested feature is not available. */
49
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_FEATURE_UNAVAILABLE               -0x7080
50
/** Bad input parameters to function. */
51
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA                    -0x7100
52
/** Verification of the message MAC failed. */
53
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_INVALID_MAC                       -0x7180
54
/** An invalid SSL record was received. */
55
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_INVALID_RECORD                    -0x7200
56
/** The connection indicated an EOF. */
57
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CONN_EOF                          -0x7280
58
/** A message could not be parsed due to a syntactic error. */
59
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_DECODE_ERROR                      -0x7300
60
/* Error space gap */
61
/** No RNG was provided to the SSL module. */
62
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_NO_RNG                            -0x7400
63
/** No client certification received from the client, but required by the authentication mode. */
64
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_NO_CLIENT_CERTIFICATE             -0x7480
65
/** Client received an extended server hello containing an unsupported extension */
66
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_UNSUPPORTED_EXTENSION             -0x7500
67
/** No ALPN protocols supported that the client advertises */
68
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_NO_APPLICATION_PROTOCOL           -0x7580
69
/** The own private key or pre-shared key is not set, but needed. */
70
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_PRIVATE_KEY_REQUIRED              -0x7600
71
/** No CA Chain is set, but required to operate. */
72
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CA_CHAIN_REQUIRED                 -0x7680
73
/** An unexpected message was received from our peer. */
74
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_UNEXPECTED_MESSAGE                -0x7700
75
/** A fatal alert message was received from our peer. */
76
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_FATAL_ALERT_MESSAGE               -0x7780
77
/** No server could be identified matching the client's SNI. */
78
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_UNRECOGNIZED_NAME                 -0x7800
79
/** The peer notified us that the connection is going to be closed. */
80
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_PEER_CLOSE_NOTIFY                 -0x7880
81
/* Error space gap */
82
/* Error space gap */
83
/** Processing of the Certificate handshake message failed. */
84
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_CERTIFICATE                   -0x7A00
85
/* Error space gap */
86
/** A TLS 1.3 NewSessionTicket message has been received. */
87
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_NEW_SESSION_TICKET       -0x7B00
88
/** Not possible to read early data */
89
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CANNOT_READ_EARLY_DATA            -0x7B80
90
/**
91
 * Early data has been received as part of an on-going handshake.
92
 * This error code can be returned only on server side if and only if early
93
 * data has been enabled by means of the mbedtls_ssl_conf_early_data() API.
94
 * This error code can then be returned by mbedtls_ssl_handshake(),
95
 * mbedtls_ssl_handshake_step(), mbedtls_ssl_read() or mbedtls_ssl_write() if
96
 * early data has been received as part of the handshake sequence they
97
 * triggered. To read the early data, call mbedtls_ssl_read_early_data().
98
 */
99
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_EARLY_DATA               -0x7C00
100
/** Not possible to write early data */
101
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CANNOT_WRITE_EARLY_DATA           -0x7C80
102
/* Error space gap */
103
/* Error space gap */
104
/* Error space gap */
105
/* Error space gap */
106
/** Cache entry not found */
107
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CACHE_ENTRY_NOT_FOUND             -0x7E80
108
/** Memory allocation failed */
109
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ALLOC_FAILED                      -0x7F00
110
/** Hardware acceleration function returned with error */
111
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_HW_ACCEL_FAILED                   -0x7F80
112
/** Hardware acceleration function skipped / left alone data */
113
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_HW_ACCEL_FALLTHROUGH              -0x6F80
114
/** Handshake protocol not within min/max boundaries */
115
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_PROTOCOL_VERSION              -0x6E80
116
/** The handshake negotiation failed. */
117
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_HANDSHAKE_FAILURE                 -0x6E00
118
/** Session ticket has expired. */
119
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_SESSION_TICKET_EXPIRED            -0x6D80
120
/** Public key type mismatch (eg, asked for RSA key exchange and presented EC key) */
121
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_PK_TYPE_MISMATCH                  -0x6D00
122
/** Unknown identity received (eg, PSK identity) */
123
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_UNKNOWN_IDENTITY                  -0x6C80
124
/** Internal error (eg, unexpected failure in lower-level module) */
125
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_INTERNAL_ERROR                    -0x6C00
126
/** A counter would wrap (eg, too many messages exchanged). */
127
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_COUNTER_WRAPPING                  -0x6B80
128
/** Unexpected message at ServerHello in renegotiation. */
129
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WAITING_SERVER_HELLO_RENEGO       -0x6B00
130
/** DTLS client must retry for hello verification */
131
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_HELLO_VERIFY_REQUIRED             -0x6A80
132
/** A buffer is too small to receive or write a message */
133
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BUFFER_TOO_SMALL                  -0x6A00
134
/* Error space gap */
135
/** No data of requested type currently available on underlying transport. */
136
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ                         -0x6900
137
/** Connection requires a write call. */
138
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_WRITE                        -0x6880
139
/** The operation timed out. */
140
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_TIMEOUT                           -0x6800
141
/** The client initiated a reconnect from the same port. */
142
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CLIENT_RECONNECT                  -0x6780
143
/** Record header looks valid but is not expected. */
144
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_UNEXPECTED_RECORD                 -0x6700
145
/** The alert message received indicates a non-fatal error. */
146
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_NON_FATAL                         -0x6680
147
/** A field in a message was incorrect or inconsistent with other fields. */
148
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ILLEGAL_PARAMETER                 -0x6600
149
/** Internal-only message signaling that further message-processing should be done */
150
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CONTINUE_PROCESSING               -0x6580
151
/** The asynchronous operation is not completed yet. */
152
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ASYNC_IN_PROGRESS                 -0x6500
153
/** Internal-only message signaling that a message arrived early. */
154
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_EARLY_MESSAGE                     -0x6480
155
/* Error space gap */
156
/* Error space gap */
157
/* Error space gap */
158
/* Error space gap */
159
/* Error space gap */
160
/* Error space gap */
161
/* Error space gap */
162
/* Error space gap */
163
/** An encrypted DTLS-frame with an unexpected CID was received. */
164
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_UNEXPECTED_CID                    -0x6000
165
/** An operation failed due to an unexpected version or configuration. */
166
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_VERSION_MISMATCH                  -0x5F00
167
/** Invalid value in SSL config */
168
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_CONFIG                        -0x5E80
169
/* Error space gap */
170
/** Attempt to verify a certificate without an expected hostname.
171
 * This is usually insecure.
172
 *
173
 * In TLS clients, when a client authenticates a server through its
174
 * certificate, the client normally checks three things:
175
 * - the certificate chain must be valid;
176
 * - the chain must start from a trusted CA;
177
 * - the certificate must cover the server name that is expected by the client.
178
 *
179
 * Omitting any of these checks is generally insecure, and can allow a
180
 * malicious server to impersonate a legitimate server.
181
 *
182
 * The third check may be safely skipped in some unusual scenarios,
183
 * such as networks where eavesdropping is a risk but not active attacks,
184
 * or a private PKI where the client equally trusts all servers that are
185
 * accredited by the root CA.
186
 *
187
 * You should call mbedtls_ssl_set_hostname() with the expected server name
188
 * before starting a TLS handshake on a client (unless the client is
189
 * set up to only use PSK-based authentication, which does not rely on the
190
 * host name). If you have determined that server name verification is not
191
 * required for security in your scenario, call mbedtls_ssl_set_hostname()
192
 * with \p NULL as the server name.
193
 *
194
 * This error is raised if all of the following conditions are met:
195
 *
196
 * - A TLS client is configured with the authentication mode
197
 *   #MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_REQUIRED (default).
198
 * - Certificate authentication is enabled.
199
 * - The client does not call mbedtls_ssl_set_hostname().
200
 * - The configuration option
201
 *   #MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_ALLOW_WEAK_CERTIFICATE_VERIFICATION_WITHOUT_HOSTNAME
202
 *   is not enabled.
203
 */
204
#define MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CERTIFICATE_VERIFICATION_WITHOUT_HOSTNAME  -0x5D80
205
206
/*
207
 * Constants from RFC 8446 for TLS 1.3 PSK modes
208
 *
209
 * Those are used in the Pre-Shared Key Exchange Modes extension.
210
 * See Section 4.2.9 in RFC 8446.
211
 */
212
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_PSK_MODE_PURE  0 /* Pure PSK-based exchange  */
213
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_PSK_MODE_ECDHE 1 /* PSK+ECDHE-based exchange */
214
215
/*
216
 * TLS 1.3 NamedGroup values
217
 *
218
 * From RF 8446
219
 *    enum {
220
 *         // Elliptic Curve Groups (ECDHE)
221
 *         secp256r1(0x0017), secp384r1(0x0018), secp521r1(0x0019),
222
 *         x25519(0x001D), x448(0x001E),
223
 *         // Finite Field Groups (DHE)
224
 *         ffdhe2048(0x0100), ffdhe3072(0x0101), ffdhe4096(0x0102),
225
 *         ffdhe6144(0x0103), ffdhe8192(0x0104),
226
 *         // Reserved Code Points
227
 *         ffdhe_private_use(0x01FC..0x01FF),
228
 *         ecdhe_private_use(0xFE00..0xFEFF),
229
 *         (0xFFFF)
230
 *     } NamedGroup;
231
 *
232
 */
233
234
/* Elliptic Curve Groups (ECDHE) */
235
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_NONE               0
236
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_SECP192K1     0x0012
237
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_SECP192R1     0x0013
238
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_SECP224K1     0x0014
239
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_SECP224R1     0x0015
240
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_SECP256K1     0x0016
241
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_SECP256R1     0x0017
242
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_SECP384R1     0x0018
243
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_SECP521R1     0x0019
244
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_BP256R1       0x001A
245
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_BP384R1       0x001B
246
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_BP512R1       0x001C
247
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_X25519        0x001D
248
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_X448          0x001E
249
/* Finite Field Groups (DHE) */
250
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_FFDHE2048     0x0100
251
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_FFDHE3072     0x0101
252
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_FFDHE4096     0x0102
253
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_FFDHE6144     0x0103
254
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_IANA_TLS_GROUP_FFDHE8192     0x0104
255
256
/*
257
 * TLS 1.3 Key Exchange Modes
258
 *
259
 * Mbed TLS internal identifiers for use with the SSL configuration API
260
 * mbedtls_ssl_conf_tls13_key_exchange_modes().
261
 */
262
263
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_PSK            (1u << 0)   /*!< Pure-PSK TLS 1.3 key exchange,
264
                                                                         *   encompassing both externally agreed PSKs
265
                                                                         *   as well as resumption PSKs. */
266
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_EPHEMERAL      (1u << 1)   /*!< Pure-Ephemeral TLS 1.3 key exchanges,
267
                                                                         *   including for example ECDHE and DHE
268
                                                                         *   key exchanges. */
269
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_PSK_EPHEMERAL  (1u << 2)   /*!< PSK-Ephemeral TLS 1.3 key exchanges,
270
                                                                         *   using both a PSK and an ephemeral
271
                                                                         *   key exchange. */
272
273
/* Convenience macros for sets of key exchanges. */
274
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_ALL                         \
275
    (MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_PSK              |            \
276
     MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_PSK_EPHEMERAL    |            \
277
     MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_EPHEMERAL)          /*!< All TLS 1.3 key exchanges           */
278
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_PSK_ALL                     \
279
    (MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_PSK              |            \
280
     MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_PSK_EPHEMERAL)      /*!< All PSK-based TLS 1.3 key exchanges */
281
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_EPHEMERAL_ALL               \
282
    (MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_EPHEMERAL        |            \
283
     MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_PSK_EPHEMERAL)      /*!< All ephemeral TLS 1.3 key exchanges */
284
285
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_NONE   (0)
286
287
/*
288
 * Various constants
289
 */
290
291
#if !defined(MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED_REMOVED)
292
/* These are the high and low bytes of ProtocolVersion as defined by:
293
 * - RFC 5246: ProtocolVersion version = { 3, 3 };     // TLS v1.2
294
 * - RFC 8446: see section 4.2.1
295
 */
296
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_MAJOR_VERSION_3             3
297
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_MINOR_VERSION_3             3   /*!< TLS v1.2 */
298
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_MINOR_VERSION_4             4   /*!< TLS v1.3 */
299
#endif /* MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED_REMOVED */
300
301
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TRANSPORT_STREAM            0   /*!< TLS      */
302
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TRANSPORT_DATAGRAM          1   /*!< DTLS     */
303
304
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_HOST_NAME_LEN           255 /*!< Maximum host name defined in RFC 1035 */
305
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_ALPN_NAME_LEN           255 /*!< Maximum size in bytes of a protocol name in alpn ext., RFC 7301 */
306
307
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_ALPN_LIST_LEN           65535 /*!< Maximum size in bytes of list in alpn ext., RFC 7301          */
308
309
/* RFC 6066 section 4, see also mfl_code_to_length in ssl_tls.c
310
 * NONE must be zero so that memset()ing structure to zero works */
311
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAG_LEN_NONE           0   /*!< don't use this extension   */
312
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAG_LEN_512            1   /*!< MaxFragmentLength 2^9      */
313
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAG_LEN_1024           2   /*!< MaxFragmentLength 2^10     */
314
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAG_LEN_2048           3   /*!< MaxFragmentLength 2^11     */
315
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAG_LEN_4096           4   /*!< MaxFragmentLength 2^12     */
316
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAG_LEN_INVALID        5   /*!< first invalid value        */
317
318
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_IS_CLIENT                   0
319
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_IS_SERVER                   1
320
321
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_EXTENDED_MS_DISABLED        0
322
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_EXTENDED_MS_ENABLED         1
323
324
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_DISABLED                0
325
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_ENABLED                 1
326
327
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ETM_DISABLED                0
328
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ETM_ENABLED                 1
329
330
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_COMPRESS_NULL               0
331
332
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_NONE                 0
333
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_OPTIONAL             1
334
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_REQUIRED             2
335
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_UNSET                3 /* Used only for sni_authmode */
336
337
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_LEGACY_RENEGOTIATION        0
338
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_SECURE_RENEGOTIATION        1
339
340
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION_DISABLED      0
341
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION_ENABLED       1
342
343
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ANTI_REPLAY_DISABLED        0
344
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ANTI_REPLAY_ENABLED         1
345
346
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION_NOT_ENFORCED  -1
347
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGO_MAX_RECORDS_DEFAULT  16
348
349
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_LEGACY_NO_RENEGOTIATION     0
350
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_LEGACY_ALLOW_RENEGOTIATION  1
351
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_LEGACY_BREAK_HANDSHAKE      2
352
353
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TRUNC_HMAC_DISABLED         0
354
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TRUNC_HMAC_ENABLED          1
355
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TRUNCATED_HMAC_LEN          10  /* 80 bits, rfc 6066 section 7 */
356
357
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS_DISABLED     0
358
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS_ENABLED      1
359
360
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_SIGNAL_NEW_SESSION_TICKETS_DISABLED  0
361
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_SIGNAL_NEW_SESSION_TICKETS_ENABLED   1
362
363
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_PRESET_DEFAULT              0
364
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_PRESET_SUITEB               2
365
366
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_CERT_REQ_CA_LIST_ENABLED       1
367
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_CERT_REQ_CA_LIST_DISABLED      0
368
369
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_DISABLED        0
370
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_ENABLED         1
371
372
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_SRTP_MKI_UNSUPPORTED    0
373
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_SRTP_MKI_SUPPORTED      1
374
375
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_CIPHERSUITE_ORDER_CLIENT  1
376
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_CIPHERSUITE_ORDER_SERVER  0
377
378
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS)
379
#if defined(PSA_WANT_ALG_SHA_384)
380
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_TICKET_RESUMPTION_KEY_LEN        48
381
#elif defined(PSA_WANT_ALG_SHA_256)
382
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_TICKET_RESUMPTION_KEY_LEN        32
383
#endif
384
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3 && MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS */
385
/*
386
 * Default range for DTLS retransmission timer value, in milliseconds.
387
 * RFC 6347 4.2.4.1 says from 1 second to 60 seconds.
388
 */
389
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_TIMEOUT_DFL_MIN    1000
390
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_TIMEOUT_DFL_MAX   60000
391
392
/*
393
 * Whether early data record should be discarded or not and how.
394
 *
395
 * The client has indicated early data and the server has rejected them.
396
 * The server has then to skip past early data by either:
397
 * - attempting to deprotect received records using the handshake traffic
398
 *   key, discarding records which fail deprotection (up to the configured
399
 *   max_early_data_size). Once a record is deprotected successfully,
400
 *   it is treated as the start of the client's second flight and the
401
 *   server proceeds as with an ordinary 1-RTT handshake.
402
 * - skipping all records with an external content type of
403
 *   "application_data" (indicating that they are encrypted), up to the
404
 *   configured max_early_data_size. This is the expected behavior if the
405
 *   server has sent an HelloRetryRequest message. The server ignores
406
 *   application data message before 2nd ClientHello.
407
 */
408
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_NO_DISCARD 0
409
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_TRY_TO_DEPROTECT_AND_DISCARD 1
410
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_DISCARD 2
411
412
/**
413
 * \name SECTION: Module settings
414
 *
415
 * The configuration options you can set for this module are in this section.
416
 * Either change them in mbedtls_config.h or define them on the compiler command line.
417
 * \{
418
 */
419
420
/*
421
 * Maximum fragment length in bytes,
422
 * determines the size of each of the two internal I/O buffers.
423
 *
424
 * Note: the RFC defines the default size of SSL / TLS messages. If you
425
 * change the value here, other clients / servers may not be able to
426
 * communicate with you anymore. Only change this value if you control
427
 * both sides of the connection and have it reduced at both sides, or
428
 * if you're using the Max Fragment Length extension and you know all your
429
 * peers are using it too!
430
 */
431
#if !defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_IN_CONTENT_LEN)
432
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_IN_CONTENT_LEN 16384
433
#endif
434
435
#if !defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_OUT_CONTENT_LEN)
436
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_OUT_CONTENT_LEN 16384
437
#endif
438
439
/*
440
 * Maximum number of heap-allocated bytes for the purpose of
441
 * DTLS handshake message reassembly and future message buffering.
442
 */
443
#if !defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_MAX_BUFFERING)
444
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_MAX_BUFFERING 32768
445
#endif
446
447
/*
448
 * Maximum length of CIDs for incoming and outgoing messages.
449
 */
450
#if !defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_IN_LEN_MAX)
451
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_IN_LEN_MAX          32
452
#endif
453
454
#if !defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_OUT_LEN_MAX)
455
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_OUT_LEN_MAX         32
456
#endif
457
458
#if !defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_TLS1_3_PADDING_GRANULARITY)
459
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_TLS1_3_PADDING_GRANULARITY 16
460
#endif
461
462
#if !defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_EARLY_DATA_SIZE)
463
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_EARLY_DATA_SIZE        1024
464
#endif
465
466
#if !defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_TICKET_AGE_TOLERANCE)
467
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_TICKET_AGE_TOLERANCE 6000
468
#endif
469
470
#if !defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_TICKET_NONCE_LENGTH)
471
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_TICKET_NONCE_LENGTH 32
472
#endif
473
474
#if !defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_DEFAULT_NEW_SESSION_TICKETS)
475
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_DEFAULT_NEW_SESSION_TICKETS 1
476
#endif
477
478
/** \} name SECTION: Module settings */
479
480
/*
481
 * Default to standard CID mode
482
 */
483
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID) && \
484
    !defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID_COMPAT)
485
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID_COMPAT 0
486
#endif
487
488
/*
489
 * Length of the verify data for secure renegotiation
490
 */
491
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_DATA_MAX_LEN 12
492
493
/*
494
 * Signaling ciphersuite values (SCSV)
495
 */
496
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_EMPTY_RENEGOTIATION_INFO    0xFF   /**< renegotiation info ext */
497
498
/*
499
 * Supported Signature and Hash algorithms (For TLS 1.2)
500
 * RFC 5246 section 7.4.1.4.1
501
 */
502
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_HASH_NONE                0
503
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_HASH_MD5                 1
504
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_HASH_SHA1                2
505
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_HASH_SHA224              3
506
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_HASH_SHA256              4
507
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_HASH_SHA384              5
508
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_HASH_SHA512              6
509
510
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_SIG_ANON                 0
511
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_SIG_RSA                  1
512
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_SIG_ECDSA                3
513
514
/*
515
 * TLS 1.3 signature algorithms
516
 * RFC 8446, Section 4.2.3
517
 */
518
519
/* RSASSA-PKCS1-v1_5 algorithms */
520
#define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_RSA_PKCS1_SHA256 0x0401
521
#define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_RSA_PKCS1_SHA384 0x0501
522
#define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_RSA_PKCS1_SHA512 0x0601
523
524
/* ECDSA algorithms */
525
#define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_ECDSA_SECP256R1_SHA256 0x0403
526
#define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_ECDSA_SECP384R1_SHA384 0x0503
527
#define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_ECDSA_SECP521R1_SHA512 0x0603
528
529
/* RSASSA-PSS algorithms with public key OID rsaEncryption */
530
#define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_RSA_PSS_RSAE_SHA256 0x0804
531
#define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_RSA_PSS_RSAE_SHA384 0x0805
532
#define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_RSA_PSS_RSAE_SHA512 0x0806
533
534
/* EdDSA algorithms */
535
#define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_ED25519 0x0807
536
#define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_ED448 0x0808
537
538
/* RSASSA-PSS algorithms with public key OID RSASSA-PSS  */
539
#define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_RSA_PSS_PSS_SHA256 0x0809
540
#define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_RSA_PSS_PSS_SHA384 0x080A
541
#define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_RSA_PSS_PSS_SHA512 0x080B
542
543
/* LEGACY ALGORITHMS */
544
#define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_RSA_PKCS1_SHA1 0x0201
545
#define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_ECDSA_SHA1     0x0203
546
547
#define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_NONE 0x0
548
549
/*
550
 * Client Certificate Types
551
 * RFC 5246 section 7.4.4 plus RFC 4492 section 5.5
552
 */
553
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_CERT_TYPE_RSA_SIGN       1
554
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_CERT_TYPE_ECDSA_SIGN    64
555
556
/*
557
 * Message, alert and handshake types
558
 */
559
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_MSG_CHANGE_CIPHER_SPEC     20
560
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_MSG_ALERT                  21
561
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_MSG_HANDSHAKE              22
562
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_MSG_APPLICATION_DATA       23
563
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_MSG_CID                    25
564
565
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_LEVEL_WARNING         1
566
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_LEVEL_FATAL           2
567
568
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_CLOSE_NOTIFY           0  /* 0x00 */
569
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_UNEXPECTED_MESSAGE    10  /* 0x0A */
570
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_BAD_RECORD_MAC        20  /* 0x14 */
571
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_DECRYPTION_FAILED     21  /* 0x15 */
572
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_RECORD_OVERFLOW       22  /* 0x16 */
573
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_DECOMPRESSION_FAILURE 30  /* 0x1E */
574
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_HANDSHAKE_FAILURE     40  /* 0x28 */
575
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_NO_CERT               41  /* 0x29 */
576
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_BAD_CERT              42  /* 0x2A */
577
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_UNSUPPORTED_CERT      43  /* 0x2B */
578
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_CERT_REVOKED          44  /* 0x2C */
579
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_CERT_EXPIRED          45  /* 0x2D */
580
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_CERT_UNKNOWN          46  /* 0x2E */
581
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_ILLEGAL_PARAMETER     47  /* 0x2F */
582
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_UNKNOWN_CA            48  /* 0x30 */
583
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_ACCESS_DENIED         49  /* 0x31 */
584
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_DECODE_ERROR          50  /* 0x32 */
585
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_DECRYPT_ERROR         51  /* 0x33 */
586
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_EXPORT_RESTRICTION    60  /* 0x3C */
587
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_PROTOCOL_VERSION      70  /* 0x46 */
588
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_INSUFFICIENT_SECURITY 71  /* 0x47 */
589
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_INTERNAL_ERROR        80  /* 0x50 */
590
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_INAPROPRIATE_FALLBACK 86  /* 0x56 */
591
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_USER_CANCELED         90  /* 0x5A */
592
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_NO_RENEGOTIATION     100  /* 0x64 */
593
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_MISSING_EXTENSION    109  /* 0x6d -- new in TLS 1.3 */
594
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_UNSUPPORTED_EXT      110  /* 0x6E */
595
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_UNRECOGNIZED_NAME    112  /* 0x70 */
596
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_UNKNOWN_PSK_IDENTITY 115  /* 0x73 */
597
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_CERT_REQUIRED        116  /* 0x74 */
598
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_MSG_NO_APPLICATION_PROTOCOL 120 /* 0x78 */
599
600
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_HS_HELLO_REQUEST            0
601
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_HS_CLIENT_HELLO             1
602
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_HS_SERVER_HELLO             2
603
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_HS_HELLO_VERIFY_REQUEST     3
604
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_HS_NEW_SESSION_TICKET       4
605
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_HS_END_OF_EARLY_DATA        5
606
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_HS_ENCRYPTED_EXTENSIONS     8
607
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_HS_CERTIFICATE             11
608
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_HS_SERVER_KEY_EXCHANGE     12
609
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_HS_CERTIFICATE_REQUEST     13
610
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_HS_SERVER_HELLO_DONE       14
611
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_HS_CERTIFICATE_VERIFY      15
612
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_HS_CLIENT_KEY_EXCHANGE     16
613
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_HS_FINISHED                20
614
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_HS_MESSAGE_HASH           254
615
616
/*
617
 * TLS extensions
618
 */
619
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_SERVERNAME                   0
620
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_SERVERNAME_HOSTNAME          0
621
622
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_MAX_FRAGMENT_LENGTH          1
623
624
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_TRUNCATED_HMAC               4
625
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_STATUS_REQUEST               5 /* RFC 6066 TLS 1.2 and 1.3 */
626
627
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_SUPPORTED_ELLIPTIC_CURVES   10
628
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_SUPPORTED_GROUPS            10 /* RFC 8422,7919 TLS 1.2 and 1.3 */
629
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_SUPPORTED_POINT_FORMATS     11
630
631
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_SIG_ALG                     13 /* RFC 8446 TLS 1.3 */
632
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_USE_SRTP                    14
633
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_HEARTBEAT                   15 /* RFC 6520 TLS 1.2 and 1.3 */
634
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_ALPN                        16
635
636
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_SCT                         18 /* RFC 6962 TLS 1.2 and 1.3 */
637
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_CLI_CERT_TYPE               19 /* RFC 7250 TLS 1.2 and 1.3 */
638
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_SERV_CERT_TYPE              20 /* RFC 7250 TLS 1.2 and 1.3 */
639
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_PADDING                     21 /* RFC 7685 TLS 1.2 and 1.3 */
640
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_ENCRYPT_THEN_MAC            22 /* 0x16 */
641
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_EXTENDED_MASTER_SECRET  0x0017 /* 23 */
642
643
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_RECORD_SIZE_LIMIT           28 /* RFC 8449 (implemented for TLS 1.3 only) */
644
645
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_SESSION_TICKET              35
646
647
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_PRE_SHARED_KEY              41 /* RFC 8446 TLS 1.3 */
648
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_EARLY_DATA                  42 /* RFC 8446 TLS 1.3 */
649
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_SUPPORTED_VERSIONS          43 /* RFC 8446 TLS 1.3 */
650
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_COOKIE                      44 /* RFC 8446 TLS 1.3 */
651
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_PSK_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODES      45 /* RFC 8446 TLS 1.3 */
652
653
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_CERT_AUTH                   47 /* RFC 8446 TLS 1.3 */
654
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_OID_FILTERS                 48 /* RFC 8446 TLS 1.3 */
655
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_POST_HANDSHAKE_AUTH         49 /* RFC 8446 TLS 1.3 */
656
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_SIG_ALG_CERT                50 /* RFC 8446 TLS 1.3 */
657
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_KEY_SHARE                   51 /* RFC 8446 TLS 1.3 */
658
659
#if MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID_COMPAT == 0
660
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_CID                         54 /* RFC 9146 DTLS 1.2 CID */
661
#else
662
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_CID                        254 /* Pre-RFC 9146 DTLS 1.2 CID */
663
#endif
664
665
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_ECJPAKE_KKPP               256 /* experimental */
666
667
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_EXT_RENEGOTIATION_INFO      0xFF01
668
669
/*
670
 * Size defines
671
 */
672
#if !defined(MBEDTLS_PSK_MAX_LEN)
673
/*
674
 * If the library supports TLS 1.3 tickets and the cipher suite
675
 * TLS1-3-AES-256-GCM-SHA384, set the PSK maximum length to 48 instead of 32.
676
 * That way, the TLS 1.3 client and server are able to resume sessions where
677
 * the cipher suite is TLS1-3-AES-256-GCM-SHA384 (pre-shared keys are 48
678
 * bytes long in that case).
679
 */
680
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3) && \
681
    defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS) && \
682
    defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_HAVE_AES) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_HAVE_GCM) && \
683
    defined(MBEDTLS_MD_CAN_SHA384)
684
#define MBEDTLS_PSK_MAX_LEN 48 /* 384 bits */
685
#else
686
#define MBEDTLS_PSK_MAX_LEN 32 /* 256 bits */
687
#endif
688
#endif /* !MBEDTLS_PSK_MAX_LEN */
689
690
/* Dummy type used only for its size */
691
union mbedtls_ssl_premaster_secret {
692
    unsigned char dummy; /* Make the union non-empty even with SSL disabled */
693
#if defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_RSA_ENABLED)
694
    unsigned char _pms_rsa[48];                         /* RFC 5246 8.1.1 */
695
#endif
696
#if defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_DHE_RSA_ENABLED)
697
    unsigned char _pms_dhm[MBEDTLS_MPI_MAX_SIZE];      /* RFC 5246 8.1.2 */
698
#endif
699
#if defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_ECDHE_RSA_ENABLED)    || \
700
    defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_ECDHE_ECDSA_ENABLED)  || \
701
    defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_ECDH_RSA_ENABLED)     || \
702
    defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_ECDH_ECDSA_ENABLED)
703
    unsigned char _pms_ecdh[MBEDTLS_ECP_MAX_BYTES];    /* RFC 4492 5.10 */
704
#endif
705
#if defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_PSK_ENABLED)
706
    unsigned char _pms_psk[4 + 2 * MBEDTLS_PSK_MAX_LEN];       /* RFC 4279 2 */
707
#endif
708
#if defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_DHE_PSK_ENABLED)
709
    unsigned char _pms_dhe_psk[4 + MBEDTLS_MPI_MAX_SIZE
710
                               + MBEDTLS_PSK_MAX_LEN];         /* RFC 4279 3 */
711
#endif
712
#if defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_RSA_PSK_ENABLED)
713
    unsigned char _pms_rsa_psk[52 + MBEDTLS_PSK_MAX_LEN];      /* RFC 4279 4 */
714
#endif
715
#if defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_ECDHE_PSK_ENABLED)
716
    unsigned char _pms_ecdhe_psk[4 + MBEDTLS_ECP_MAX_BYTES
717
                                 + MBEDTLS_PSK_MAX_LEN];       /* RFC 5489 2 */
718
#endif
719
#if defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_ECJPAKE_ENABLED)
720
    unsigned char _pms_ecjpake[32];     /* Thread spec: SHA-256 output */
721
#endif
722
};
723
724
#define MBEDTLS_PREMASTER_SIZE     sizeof(union mbedtls_ssl_premaster_secret)
725
726
#define MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_MD_MAX_SIZE         PSA_HASH_MAX_SIZE
727
728
729
/* Length in number of bytes of the TLS sequence number */
730
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_SEQUENCE_NUMBER_LEN 8
731
732
/* Helper to state that client_random and server_random need to be stored
733
 * after the handshake is complete. This is required for context serialization
734
 * and for the keying material exporter in TLS 1.2. */
735
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CONTEXT_SERIALIZATION) || \
736
    (defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_KEYING_MATERIAL_EXPORT) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_2))
737
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_KEEP_RANDBYTES
738
#endif
739
740
#ifdef __cplusplus
741
extern "C" {
742
#endif
743
744
/*
745
 * SSL state machine
746
 */
747
typedef enum {
748
    MBEDTLS_SSL_HELLO_REQUEST,
749
    MBEDTLS_SSL_CLIENT_HELLO,
750
    MBEDTLS_SSL_SERVER_HELLO,
751
    MBEDTLS_SSL_SERVER_CERTIFICATE,
752
    MBEDTLS_SSL_SERVER_KEY_EXCHANGE,
753
    MBEDTLS_SSL_CERTIFICATE_REQUEST,
754
    MBEDTLS_SSL_SERVER_HELLO_DONE,
755
    MBEDTLS_SSL_CLIENT_CERTIFICATE,
756
    MBEDTLS_SSL_CLIENT_KEY_EXCHANGE,
757
    MBEDTLS_SSL_CERTIFICATE_VERIFY,
758
    MBEDTLS_SSL_CLIENT_CHANGE_CIPHER_SPEC,
759
    MBEDTLS_SSL_CLIENT_FINISHED,
760
    MBEDTLS_SSL_SERVER_CHANGE_CIPHER_SPEC,
761
    MBEDTLS_SSL_SERVER_FINISHED,
762
    MBEDTLS_SSL_FLUSH_BUFFERS,
763
    MBEDTLS_SSL_HANDSHAKE_WRAPUP,
764
    MBEDTLS_SSL_NEW_SESSION_TICKET,
765
    MBEDTLS_SSL_SERVER_HELLO_VERIFY_REQUEST_SENT,
766
    MBEDTLS_SSL_HELLO_RETRY_REQUEST,
767
    MBEDTLS_SSL_ENCRYPTED_EXTENSIONS,
768
    MBEDTLS_SSL_END_OF_EARLY_DATA,
769
    MBEDTLS_SSL_CLIENT_CERTIFICATE_VERIFY,
770
    MBEDTLS_SSL_CLIENT_CCS_AFTER_SERVER_FINISHED,
771
    MBEDTLS_SSL_CLIENT_CCS_BEFORE_2ND_CLIENT_HELLO,
772
    MBEDTLS_SSL_SERVER_CCS_AFTER_SERVER_HELLO,
773
    MBEDTLS_SSL_CLIENT_CCS_AFTER_CLIENT_HELLO,
774
    MBEDTLS_SSL_SERVER_CCS_AFTER_HELLO_RETRY_REQUEST,
775
    MBEDTLS_SSL_HANDSHAKE_OVER,
776
    MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_NEW_SESSION_TICKET,
777
    MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_NEW_SESSION_TICKET_FLUSH,
778
}
779
mbedtls_ssl_states;
780
781
/*
782
 * Early data status, client side only.
783
 */
784
785
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C)
786
typedef enum {
787
/*
788
 * See documentation of mbedtls_ssl_get_early_data_status().
789
 */
790
    MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_STATUS_NOT_INDICATED,
791
    MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_STATUS_ACCEPTED,
792
    MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_STATUS_REJECTED,
793
} mbedtls_ssl_early_data_status;
794
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA && MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C */
795
796
/**
797
 * \brief          Callback type: send data on the network.
798
 *
799
 * \note           That callback may be either blocking or non-blocking.
800
 *
801
 * \param ctx      Context for the send callback (typically a file descriptor)
802
 * \param buf      Buffer holding the data to send
803
 * \param len      Length of the data to send
804
 *
805
 * \return         The callback must return the number of bytes sent if any,
806
 *                 or a non-zero error code.
807
 *                 If performing non-blocking I/O, \c MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_WRITE
808
 *                 must be returned when the operation would block.
809
 *
810
 * \note           The callback is allowed to send fewer bytes than requested.
811
 *                 It must always return the number of bytes actually sent.
812
 */
813
typedef int mbedtls_ssl_send_t(void *ctx,
814
                               const unsigned char *buf,
815
                               size_t len);
816
817
/**
818
 * \brief          Callback type: receive data from the network.
819
 *
820
 * \note           That callback may be either blocking or non-blocking.
821
 *
822
 * \param ctx      Context for the receive callback (typically a file
823
 *                 descriptor)
824
 * \param buf      Buffer to write the received data to
825
 * \param len      Length of the receive buffer
826
 *
827
 * \returns        If data has been received, the positive number of bytes received.
828
 * \returns        \c 0 if the connection has been closed.
829
 * \returns        If performing non-blocking I/O, \c MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ
830
 *                 must be returned when the operation would block.
831
 * \returns        Another negative error code on other kinds of failures.
832
 *
833
 * \note           The callback may receive fewer bytes than the length of the
834
 *                 buffer. It must always return the number of bytes actually
835
 *                 received and written to the buffer.
836
 */
837
typedef int mbedtls_ssl_recv_t(void *ctx,
838
                               unsigned char *buf,
839
                               size_t len);
840
841
/**
842
 * \brief          Callback type: receive data from the network, with timeout
843
 *
844
 * \note           That callback must block until data is received, or the
845
 *                 timeout delay expires, or the operation is interrupted by a
846
 *                 signal.
847
 *
848
 * \param ctx      Context for the receive callback (typically a file descriptor)
849
 * \param buf      Buffer to write the received data to
850
 * \param len      Length of the receive buffer
851
 * \param timeout  Maximum number of milliseconds to wait for data
852
 *                 0 means no timeout (potentially waiting forever)
853
 *
854
 * \return         The callback must return the number of bytes received,
855
 *                 or a non-zero error code:
856
 *                 \c MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_TIMEOUT if the operation timed out,
857
 *                 \c MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ if interrupted by a signal.
858
 *
859
 * \note           The callback may receive fewer bytes than the length of the
860
 *                 buffer. It must always return the number of bytes actually
861
 *                 received and written to the buffer.
862
 */
863
typedef int mbedtls_ssl_recv_timeout_t(void *ctx,
864
                                       unsigned char *buf,
865
                                       size_t len,
866
                                       uint32_t timeout);
867
/**
868
 * \brief          Callback type: set a pair of timers/delays to watch
869
 *
870
 * \param ctx      Context pointer
871
 * \param int_ms   Intermediate delay in milliseconds
872
 * \param fin_ms   Final delay in milliseconds
873
 *                 0 cancels the current timer.
874
 *
875
 * \note           This callback must at least store the necessary information
876
 *                 for the associated \c mbedtls_ssl_get_timer_t callback to
877
 *                 return correct information.
878
 *
879
 * \note           If using an event-driven style of programming, an event must
880
 *                 be generated when the final delay is passed. The event must
881
 *                 cause a call to \c mbedtls_ssl_handshake() with the proper
882
 *                 SSL context to be scheduled. Care must be taken to ensure
883
 *                 that at most one such call happens at a time.
884
 *
885
 * \note           Only one timer at a time must be running. Calling this
886
 *                 function while a timer is running must cancel it. Cancelled
887
 *                 timers must not generate any event.
888
 */
889
typedef void mbedtls_ssl_set_timer_t(void *ctx,
890
                                     uint32_t int_ms,
891
                                     uint32_t fin_ms);
892
893
/**
894
 * \brief          Callback type: get status of timers/delays
895
 *
896
 * \param ctx      Context pointer
897
 *
898
 * \return         This callback must return:
899
 *                 -1 if cancelled (fin_ms == 0),
900
 *                  0 if none of the delays have passed,
901
 *                  1 if only the intermediate delay has passed,
902
 *                  2 if the final delay has passed.
903
 */
904
typedef int mbedtls_ssl_get_timer_t(void *ctx);
905
906
/* Defined below */
907
typedef struct mbedtls_ssl_session mbedtls_ssl_session;
908
typedef struct mbedtls_ssl_context mbedtls_ssl_context;
909
typedef struct mbedtls_ssl_config  mbedtls_ssl_config;
910
911
/* Defined in library/ssl_misc.h */
912
typedef struct mbedtls_ssl_transform mbedtls_ssl_transform;
913
typedef struct mbedtls_ssl_handshake_params mbedtls_ssl_handshake_params;
914
typedef struct mbedtls_ssl_sig_hash_set_t mbedtls_ssl_sig_hash_set_t;
915
#if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C)
916
typedef struct mbedtls_ssl_key_cert mbedtls_ssl_key_cert;
917
#endif
918
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_DTLS)
919
typedef struct mbedtls_ssl_flight_item mbedtls_ssl_flight_item;
920
#endif
921
922
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS)
923
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_TICKET_ALLOW_PSK_RESUMPTION                          \
924
    MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_PSK                        /* 1U << 0 */
925
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_TICKET_ALLOW_PSK_EPHEMERAL_RESUMPTION                \
926
    MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_PSK_EPHEMERAL              /* 1U << 2 */
927
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_TICKET_ALLOW_EARLY_DATA                  (1U << 3)
928
929
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_TICKET_FLAGS_MASK                                    \
930
    (MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_TICKET_ALLOW_PSK_RESUMPTION             |      \
931
     MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_TICKET_ALLOW_PSK_EPHEMERAL_RESUMPTION   |      \
932
     MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_TICKET_ALLOW_EARLY_DATA)
933
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3 && MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS */
934
935
/**
936
 * \brief          Callback type: server-side session cache getter
937
 *
938
 *                 The session cache is logically a key value store, with
939
 *                 keys being session IDs and values being instances of
940
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_session.
941
 *
942
 *                 This callback retrieves an entry in this key-value store.
943
 *
944
 * \param data            The address of the session cache structure to query.
945
 * \param session_id      The buffer holding the session ID to query.
946
 * \param session_id_len  The length of \p session_id in Bytes.
947
 * \param session         The address of the session structure to populate.
948
 *                        It is initialized with mbdtls_ssl_session_init(),
949
 *                        and the callback must always leave it in a state
950
 *                        where it can safely be freed via
951
 *                        mbedtls_ssl_session_free() independent of the
952
 *                        return code of this function.
953
 *
954
 * \return                \c 0 on success
955
 * \return                A non-zero return value on failure.
956
 *
957
 */
958
typedef int mbedtls_ssl_cache_get_t(void *data,
959
                                    unsigned char const *session_id,
960
                                    size_t session_id_len,
961
                                    mbedtls_ssl_session *session);
962
/**
963
 * \brief          Callback type: server-side session cache setter
964
 *
965
 *                 The session cache is logically a key value store, with
966
 *                 keys being session IDs and values being instances of
967
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_session.
968
 *
969
 *                 This callback sets an entry in this key-value store.
970
 *
971
 * \param data            The address of the session cache structure to modify.
972
 * \param session_id      The buffer holding the session ID to query.
973
 * \param session_id_len  The length of \p session_id in Bytes.
974
 * \param session         The address of the session to be stored in the
975
 *                        session cache.
976
 *
977
 * \return                \c 0 on success
978
 * \return                A non-zero return value on failure.
979
 */
980
typedef int mbedtls_ssl_cache_set_t(void *data,
981
                                    unsigned char const *session_id,
982
                                    size_t session_id_len,
983
                                    const mbedtls_ssl_session *session);
984
985
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_ASYNC_PRIVATE)
986
#if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C)
987
/**
988
 * \brief           Callback type: start external signature operation.
989
 *
990
 *                  This callback is called during an SSL handshake to start
991
 *                  a signature decryption operation using an
992
 *                  external processor. The parameter \p cert contains
993
 *                  the public key; it is up to the callback function to
994
 *                  determine how to access the associated private key.
995
 *
996
 *                  This function typically sends or enqueues a request, and
997
 *                  does not wait for the operation to complete. This allows
998
 *                  the handshake step to be non-blocking.
999
 *
1000
 *                  The parameters \p ssl and \p cert are guaranteed to remain
1001
 *                  valid throughout the handshake. On the other hand, this
1002
 *                  function must save the contents of \p hash if the value
1003
 *                  is needed for later processing, because the \p hash buffer
1004
 *                  is no longer valid after this function returns.
1005
 *
1006
 *                  This function may call mbedtls_ssl_set_async_operation_data()
1007
 *                  to store an operation context for later retrieval
1008
 *                  by the resume or cancel callback.
1009
 *
1010
 * \note            For RSA signatures, this function must produce output
1011
 *                  that is consistent with PKCS#1 v1.5 in the same way as
1012
 *                  mbedtls_rsa_pkcs1_sign(). Before the private key operation,
1013
 *                  apply the padding steps described in RFC 8017, section 9.2
1014
 *                  "EMSA-PKCS1-v1_5" as follows.
1015
 *                  - If \p md_alg is #MBEDTLS_MD_NONE, apply the PKCS#1 v1.5
1016
 *                    encoding, treating \p hash as the DigestInfo to be
1017
 *                    padded. In other words, apply EMSA-PKCS1-v1_5 starting
1018
 *                    from step 3, with `T = hash` and `tLen = hash_len`.
1019
 *                  - If `md_alg != MBEDTLS_MD_NONE`, apply the PKCS#1 v1.5
1020
 *                    encoding, treating \p hash as the hash to be encoded and
1021
 *                    padded. In other words, apply EMSA-PKCS1-v1_5 starting
1022
 *                    from step 2, with `digestAlgorithm` obtained by calling
1023
 *                    mbedtls_oid_get_oid_by_md() on \p md_alg.
1024
 *
1025
 * \note            For ECDSA signatures, the output format is the DER encoding
1026
 *                  `Ecdsa-Sig-Value` defined in
1027
 *                  [RFC 4492 section 5.4](https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc4492#section-5.4).
1028
 *
1029
 * \param ssl             The SSL connection instance. It should not be
1030
 *                        modified other than via
1031
 *                        mbedtls_ssl_set_async_operation_data().
1032
 * \param cert            Certificate containing the public key.
1033
 *                        In simple cases, this is one of the pointers passed to
1034
 *                        mbedtls_ssl_conf_own_cert() when configuring the SSL
1035
 *                        connection. However, if other callbacks are used, this
1036
 *                        property may not hold. For example, if an SNI callback
1037
 *                        is registered with mbedtls_ssl_conf_sni(), then
1038
 *                        this callback determines what certificate is used.
1039
 * \param md_alg          Hash algorithm.
1040
 * \param hash            Buffer containing the hash. This buffer is
1041
 *                        no longer valid when the function returns.
1042
 * \param hash_len        Size of the \c hash buffer in bytes.
1043
 *
1044
 * \return          0 if the operation was started successfully and the SSL
1045
 *                  stack should call the resume callback immediately.
1046
 * \return          #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ASYNC_IN_PROGRESS if the operation
1047
 *                  was started successfully and the SSL stack should return
1048
 *                  immediately without calling the resume callback yet.
1049
 * \return          #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_HW_ACCEL_FALLTHROUGH if the external
1050
 *                  processor does not support this key. The SSL stack will
1051
 *                  use the private key object instead.
1052
 * \return          Any other error indicates a fatal failure and is
1053
 *                  propagated up the call chain. The callback should
1054
 *                  use \c MBEDTLS_ERR_PK_xxx error codes, and <b>must not</b>
1055
 *                  use \c MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_xxx error codes except as
1056
 *                  directed in the documentation of this callback.
1057
 */
1058
typedef int mbedtls_ssl_async_sign_t(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
1059
                                     mbedtls_x509_crt *cert,
1060
                                     mbedtls_md_type_t md_alg,
1061
                                     const unsigned char *hash,
1062
                                     size_t hash_len);
1063
1064
/**
1065
 * \brief           Callback type: start external decryption operation.
1066
 *
1067
 *                  This callback is called during an SSL handshake to start
1068
 *                  an RSA decryption operation using an
1069
 *                  external processor. The parameter \p cert contains
1070
 *                  the public key; it is up to the callback function to
1071
 *                  determine how to access the associated private key.
1072
 *
1073
 *                  This function typically sends or enqueues a request, and
1074
 *                  does not wait for the operation to complete. This allows
1075
 *                  the handshake step to be non-blocking.
1076
 *
1077
 *                  The parameters \p ssl and \p cert are guaranteed to remain
1078
 *                  valid throughout the handshake. On the other hand, this
1079
 *                  function must save the contents of \p input if the value
1080
 *                  is needed for later processing, because the \p input buffer
1081
 *                  is no longer valid after this function returns.
1082
 *
1083
 *                  This function may call mbedtls_ssl_set_async_operation_data()
1084
 *                  to store an operation context for later retrieval
1085
 *                  by the resume or cancel callback.
1086
 *
1087
 * \warning         RSA decryption as used in TLS is subject to a potential
1088
 *                  timing side channel attack first discovered by Bleichenbacher
1089
 *                  in 1998. This attack can be remotely exploitable
1090
 *                  in practice. To avoid this attack, you must ensure that
1091
 *                  if the callback performs an RSA decryption, the time it
1092
 *                  takes to execute and return the result does not depend
1093
 *                  on whether the RSA decryption succeeded or reported
1094
 *                  invalid padding.
1095
 *
1096
 * \param ssl             The SSL connection instance. It should not be
1097
 *                        modified other than via
1098
 *                        mbedtls_ssl_set_async_operation_data().
1099
 * \param cert            Certificate containing the public key.
1100
 *                        In simple cases, this is one of the pointers passed to
1101
 *                        mbedtls_ssl_conf_own_cert() when configuring the SSL
1102
 *                        connection. However, if other callbacks are used, this
1103
 *                        property may not hold. For example, if an SNI callback
1104
 *                        is registered with mbedtls_ssl_conf_sni(), then
1105
 *                        this callback determines what certificate is used.
1106
 * \param input           Buffer containing the input ciphertext. This buffer
1107
 *                        is no longer valid when the function returns.
1108
 * \param input_len       Size of the \p input buffer in bytes.
1109
 *
1110
 * \return          0 if the operation was started successfully and the SSL
1111
 *                  stack should call the resume callback immediately.
1112
 * \return          #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ASYNC_IN_PROGRESS if the operation
1113
 *                  was started successfully and the SSL stack should return
1114
 *                  immediately without calling the resume callback yet.
1115
 * \return          #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_HW_ACCEL_FALLTHROUGH if the external
1116
 *                  processor does not support this key. The SSL stack will
1117
 *                  use the private key object instead.
1118
 * \return          Any other error indicates a fatal failure and is
1119
 *                  propagated up the call chain. The callback should
1120
 *                  use \c MBEDTLS_ERR_PK_xxx error codes, and <b>must not</b>
1121
 *                  use \c MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_xxx error codes except as
1122
 *                  directed in the documentation of this callback.
1123
 */
1124
typedef int mbedtls_ssl_async_decrypt_t(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
1125
                                        mbedtls_x509_crt *cert,
1126
                                        const unsigned char *input,
1127
                                        size_t input_len);
1128
#endif /* MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C */
1129
1130
/**
1131
 * \brief           Callback type: resume external operation.
1132
 *
1133
 *                  This callback is called during an SSL handshake to resume
1134
 *                  an external operation started by the
1135
 *                  ::mbedtls_ssl_async_sign_t or
1136
 *                  ::mbedtls_ssl_async_decrypt_t callback.
1137
 *
1138
 *                  This function typically checks the status of a pending
1139
 *                  request or causes the request queue to make progress, and
1140
 *                  does not wait for the operation to complete. This allows
1141
 *                  the handshake step to be non-blocking.
1142
 *
1143
 *                  This function may call mbedtls_ssl_get_async_operation_data()
1144
 *                  to retrieve an operation context set by the start callback.
1145
 *                  It may call mbedtls_ssl_set_async_operation_data() to modify
1146
 *                  this context.
1147
 *
1148
 *                  Note that when this function returns a status other than
1149
 *                  #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ASYNC_IN_PROGRESS, it must free any
1150
 *                  resources associated with the operation.
1151
 *
1152
 * \param ssl             The SSL connection instance. It should not be
1153
 *                        modified other than via
1154
 *                        mbedtls_ssl_set_async_operation_data().
1155
 * \param output          Buffer containing the output (signature or decrypted
1156
 *                        data) on success.
1157
 * \param output_len      On success, number of bytes written to \p output.
1158
 * \param output_size     Size of the \p output buffer in bytes.
1159
 *
1160
 * \return          0 if output of the operation is available in the
1161
 *                  \p output buffer.
1162
 * \return          #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ASYNC_IN_PROGRESS if the operation
1163
 *                  is still in progress. Subsequent requests for progress
1164
 *                  on the SSL connection will call the resume callback
1165
 *                  again.
1166
 * \return          Any other error means that the operation is aborted.
1167
 *                  The SSL handshake is aborted. The callback should
1168
 *                  use \c MBEDTLS_ERR_PK_xxx error codes, and <b>must not</b>
1169
 *                  use \c MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_xxx error codes except as
1170
 *                  directed in the documentation of this callback.
1171
 */
1172
typedef int mbedtls_ssl_async_resume_t(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
1173
                                       unsigned char *output,
1174
                                       size_t *output_len,
1175
                                       size_t output_size);
1176
1177
/**
1178
 * \brief           Callback type: cancel external operation.
1179
 *
1180
 *                  This callback is called if an SSL connection is closed
1181
 *                  while an asynchronous operation is in progress. Note that
1182
 *                  this callback is not called if the
1183
 *                  ::mbedtls_ssl_async_resume_t callback has run and has
1184
 *                  returned a value other than
1185
 *                  #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ASYNC_IN_PROGRESS, since in that case
1186
 *                  the asynchronous operation has already completed.
1187
 *
1188
 *                  This function may call mbedtls_ssl_get_async_operation_data()
1189
 *                  to retrieve an operation context set by the start callback.
1190
 *
1191
 * \param ssl             The SSL connection instance. It should not be
1192
 *                        modified.
1193
 */
1194
typedef void mbedtls_ssl_async_cancel_t(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
1195
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_ASYNC_PRIVATE */
1196
1197
#if defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_WITH_CERT_ENABLED) &&        \
1198
    !defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_KEEP_PEER_CERTIFICATE)
1199
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_PEER_CERT_DIGEST_MAX_LEN  48
1200
#if defined(MBEDTLS_MD_CAN_SHA256)
1201
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_PEER_CERT_DIGEST_DFL_TYPE MBEDTLS_MD_SHA256
1202
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_PEER_CERT_DIGEST_DFL_LEN  32
1203
#elif defined(MBEDTLS_MD_CAN_SHA384)
1204
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_PEER_CERT_DIGEST_DFL_TYPE MBEDTLS_MD_SHA384
1205
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_PEER_CERT_DIGEST_DFL_LEN  48
1206
#elif defined(MBEDTLS_MD_CAN_SHA1)
1207
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_PEER_CERT_DIGEST_DFL_TYPE MBEDTLS_MD_SHA1
1208
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_PEER_CERT_DIGEST_DFL_LEN  20
1209
#else
1210
/* This is already checked in check_config.h, but be sure. */
1211
#error "Bad configuration - need SHA-1, SHA-256 or SHA-512 enabled to compute digest of peer CRT."
1212
#endif
1213
#endif /* MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_WITH_CERT_ENABLED &&
1214
          !MBEDTLS_SSL_KEEP_PEER_CERTIFICATE */
1215
1216
typedef struct {
1217
    unsigned char client_application_traffic_secret_N[MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_MD_MAX_SIZE];
1218
    unsigned char server_application_traffic_secret_N[MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_MD_MAX_SIZE];
1219
    unsigned char exporter_master_secret[MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_MD_MAX_SIZE];
1220
    unsigned char resumption_master_secret[MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_MD_MAX_SIZE];
1221
} mbedtls_ssl_tls13_application_secrets;
1222
1223
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_SRTP)
1224
1225
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_MAX_MKI_LENGTH             255
1226
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_MAX_PROFILE_LIST_LENGTH    4
1227
/*
1228
 * For code readability use a typedef for DTLS-SRTP profiles
1229
 *
1230
 * Use_srtp extension protection profiles values as defined in
1231
 * http://www.iana.org/assignments/srtp-protection/srtp-protection.xhtml
1232
 *
1233
 * Reminder: if this list is expanded mbedtls_ssl_check_srtp_profile_value
1234
 * must be updated too.
1235
 */
1236
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_AES128_CM_HMAC_SHA1_80     ((uint16_t) 0x0001)
1237
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_AES128_CM_HMAC_SHA1_32     ((uint16_t) 0x0002)
1238
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_NULL_HMAC_SHA1_80          ((uint16_t) 0x0005)
1239
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_NULL_HMAC_SHA1_32          ((uint16_t) 0x0006)
1240
/* This one is not iana defined, but for code readability. */
1241
#define MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_UNSET                      ((uint16_t) 0x0000)
1242
1243
typedef uint16_t mbedtls_ssl_srtp_profile;
1244
1245
typedef struct mbedtls_dtls_srtp_info_t {
1246
    /*! The SRTP profile that was negotiated. */
1247
    mbedtls_ssl_srtp_profile MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(chosen_dtls_srtp_profile);
1248
    /*! The length of mki_value. */
1249
    uint16_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(mki_len);
1250
    /*! The mki_value used, with max size of 256 bytes. */
1251
    unsigned char MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(mki_value)[MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_MAX_MKI_LENGTH];
1252
}
1253
mbedtls_dtls_srtp_info;
1254
1255
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_SRTP */
1256
1257
/** Human-friendly representation of the (D)TLS protocol version. */
1258
typedef enum {
1259
    MBEDTLS_SSL_VERSION_UNKNOWN, /*!< Context not in use or version not yet negotiated. */
1260
    MBEDTLS_SSL_VERSION_TLS1_2 = 0x0303, /*!< (D)TLS 1.2 */
1261
    MBEDTLS_SSL_VERSION_TLS1_3 = 0x0304, /*!< (D)TLS 1.3 */
1262
} mbedtls_ssl_protocol_version;
1263
1264
/*
1265
 * This structure is used for storing current session data.
1266
 *
1267
 * Note: when changing this definition, we need to check and update:
1268
 *  - in tests/suites/test_suite_ssl.function:
1269
 *      ssl_populate_session() and ssl_serialize_session_save_load()
1270
 *  - in library/ssl_tls.c:
1271
 *      mbedtls_ssl_session_init() and mbedtls_ssl_session_free()
1272
 *      mbedtls_ssl_session_save() and ssl_session_load()
1273
 *      ssl_session_copy()
1274
 */
1275
struct mbedtls_ssl_session {
1276
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAGMENT_LENGTH)
1277
    unsigned char MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(mfl_code);     /*!< MaxFragmentLength negotiated by peer */
1278
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAGMENT_LENGTH */
1279
1280
/*!< RecordSizeLimit received from the peer */
1281
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_RECORD_SIZE_LIMIT)
1282
    uint16_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(record_size_limit);
1283
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_RECORD_SIZE_LIMIT */
1284
1285
    unsigned char MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(exported);
1286
    uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(endpoint);          /*!< 0: client, 1: server */
1287
1288
    /** TLS version negotiated in the session. Used if and when renegotiating
1289
     *  or resuming a session instead of the configured minor TLS version.
1290
     */
1291
    mbedtls_ssl_protocol_version MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(tls_version);
1292
1293
#if defined(MBEDTLS_HAVE_TIME)
1294
    mbedtls_time_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(start);       /*!< start time of current session */
1295
#endif
1296
    int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(ciphersuite);            /*!< chosen ciphersuite */
1297
    size_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(id_len);              /*!< session id length  */
1298
    unsigned char MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(id)[32];       /*!< session identifier */
1299
    unsigned char MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(master)[48];   /*!< the master secret  */
1300
1301
#if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C)
1302
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_KEEP_PEER_CERTIFICATE)
1303
    mbedtls_x509_crt *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(peer_cert);       /*!< peer X.509 cert chain */
1304
#else /* MBEDTLS_SSL_KEEP_PEER_CERTIFICATE */
1305
    /*! The digest of the peer's end-CRT. This must be kept to detect CRT
1306
     *  changes during renegotiation, mitigating the triple handshake attack. */
1307
    unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(peer_cert_digest);
1308
    size_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(peer_cert_digest_len);
1309
    mbedtls_md_type_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(peer_cert_digest_type);
1310
#endif /* !MBEDTLS_SSL_KEEP_PEER_CERTIFICATE */
1311
#endif /* MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C */
1312
    uint32_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(verify_result);          /*!<  verification result     */
1313
1314
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C)
1315
    unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(ticket);      /*!< RFC 5077 session ticket */
1316
    size_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(ticket_len);          /*!< session ticket length   */
1317
    uint32_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(ticket_lifetime);   /*!< ticket lifetime hint    */
1318
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS && MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C */
1319
1320
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C) && \
1321
    defined(MBEDTLS_HAVE_TIME)
1322
    /*! When a ticket is created by a TLS server as part of an established TLS
1323
     *  session, the ticket creation time may need to be saved for the ticket
1324
     *  module to be able to check the ticket age when the ticket is used.
1325
     *  That's the purpose of this field.
1326
     *  Before creating a new ticket, an Mbed TLS server set this field with
1327
     *  its current time in milliseconds. This time may then be saved in the
1328
     *  session ticket data by the session ticket writing function and
1329
     *  recovered by the ticket parsing function later when the ticket is used.
1330
     *  The ticket module may then use this time to compute the ticket age and
1331
     *  determine if it has expired or not.
1332
     *  The Mbed TLS implementations of the session ticket writing and parsing
1333
     *  functions save and retrieve the ticket creation time as part of the
1334
     *  session ticket data. The session ticket parsing function relies on
1335
     *  the mbedtls_ssl_session_get_ticket_creation_time() API to get the
1336
     *  ticket creation time from the session ticket data.
1337
     */
1338
    mbedtls_ms_time_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(ticket_creation_time);
1339
#endif
1340
1341
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS)
1342
    uint32_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(ticket_age_add);     /*!< Randomly generated value used to obscure the age of the ticket */
1343
    uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(ticket_flags);        /*!< Ticket flags */
1344
    uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(resumption_key_len);  /*!< resumption_key length */
1345
    unsigned char MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(resumption_key)[MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_TICKET_RESUMPTION_KEY_LEN];
1346
1347
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SERVER_NAME_INDICATION) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C)
1348
    char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(hostname);             /*!< host name binded with tickets */
1349
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SERVER_NAME_INDICATION && MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C */
1350
1351
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_ALPN) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
1352
    char *ticket_alpn;                      /*!< ALPN negotiated in the session
1353
                                                 during which the ticket was generated. */
1354
#endif
1355
1356
#if defined(MBEDTLS_HAVE_TIME) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C)
1357
    /*! Time in milliseconds when the last ticket was received. */
1358
    mbedtls_ms_time_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(ticket_reception_time);
1359
#endif
1360
#endif /*  MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3 && MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS */
1361
1362
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA)
1363
    uint32_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(max_early_data_size);          /*!< maximum amount of early data in tickets */
1364
#endif
1365
1366
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_ENCRYPT_THEN_MAC)
1367
    int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(encrypt_then_mac);       /*!< flag for EtM activation                */
1368
#endif
1369
1370
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3)
1371
    mbedtls_ssl_tls13_application_secrets MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(app_secrets);
1372
#endif
1373
};
1374
1375
/*
1376
 * Identifiers for PRFs used in various versions of TLS.
1377
 */
1378
typedef enum {
1379
    MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS_PRF_NONE,
1380
    MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS_PRF_SHA384,
1381
    MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS_PRF_SHA256,
1382
    MBEDTLS_SSL_HKDF_EXPAND_SHA384,
1383
    MBEDTLS_SSL_HKDF_EXPAND_SHA256
1384
}
1385
mbedtls_tls_prf_types;
1386
1387
typedef enum {
1388
    MBEDTLS_SSL_KEY_EXPORT_TLS12_MASTER_SECRET = 0,
1389
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3)
1390
    MBEDTLS_SSL_KEY_EXPORT_TLS1_3_CLIENT_EARLY_SECRET,
1391
    MBEDTLS_SSL_KEY_EXPORT_TLS1_3_EARLY_EXPORTER_SECRET,
1392
    MBEDTLS_SSL_KEY_EXPORT_TLS1_3_CLIENT_HANDSHAKE_TRAFFIC_SECRET,
1393
    MBEDTLS_SSL_KEY_EXPORT_TLS1_3_SERVER_HANDSHAKE_TRAFFIC_SECRET,
1394
    MBEDTLS_SSL_KEY_EXPORT_TLS1_3_CLIENT_APPLICATION_TRAFFIC_SECRET,
1395
    MBEDTLS_SSL_KEY_EXPORT_TLS1_3_SERVER_APPLICATION_TRAFFIC_SECRET,
1396
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3 */
1397
} mbedtls_ssl_key_export_type;
1398
1399
/**
1400
 * \brief           Callback type: Export key alongside random values for
1401
 *                                 session identification, and PRF for
1402
 *                                 implementation of TLS key exporters.
1403
 *
1404
 * \param p_expkey   Context for the callback.
1405
 * \param type       The type of the key that is being exported.
1406
 * \param secret     The address of the buffer holding the secret
1407
 *                   that's being exporterd.
1408
 * \param secret_len The length of \p secret in bytes.
1409
 * \param client_random The client random bytes.
1410
 * \param server_random The server random bytes.
1411
 * \param tls_prf_type The identifier for the PRF used in the handshake
1412
 *                     to which the key belongs.
1413
 */
1414
typedef void mbedtls_ssl_export_keys_t(void *p_expkey,
1415
                                       mbedtls_ssl_key_export_type type,
1416
                                       const unsigned char *secret,
1417
                                       size_t secret_len,
1418
                                       const unsigned char client_random[32],
1419
                                       const unsigned char server_random[32],
1420
                                       mbedtls_tls_prf_types tls_prf_type);
1421
1422
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
1423
/**
1424
 * \brief           Callback type: generic handshake callback
1425
 *
1426
 * \note            Callbacks may use user_data funcs to set/get app user data.
1427
 *                  See \c mbedtls_ssl_get_user_data_p()
1428
 *                      \c mbedtls_ssl_get_user_data_n()
1429
 *                      \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_get_user_data_p()
1430
 *                      \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_get_user_data_n()
1431
 *
1432
 * \param ssl       \c mbedtls_ssl_context on which the callback is run
1433
 *
1434
 * \return          The return value of the callback is 0 if successful,
1435
 *                  or a specific MBEDTLS_ERR_XXX code, which will cause
1436
 *                  the handshake to be aborted.
1437
 */
1438
typedef int (*mbedtls_ssl_hs_cb_t)(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
1439
#endif
1440
1441
/* A type for storing user data in a library structure.
1442
 *
1443
 * The representation of type may change in future versions of the library.
1444
 * Only the behaviors guaranteed by documented accessor functions are
1445
 * guaranteed to remain stable.
1446
 */
1447
typedef union {
1448
    uintptr_t n;                /* typically a handle to an associated object */
1449
    void *p;                    /* typically a pointer to extra data */
1450
} mbedtls_ssl_user_data_t;
1451
1452
/**
1453
 * SSL/TLS configuration to be shared between mbedtls_ssl_context structures.
1454
 */
1455
struct mbedtls_ssl_config {
1456
    /* Group items mostly by size. This helps to reduce memory wasted to
1457
     * padding. It also helps to keep smaller fields early in the structure,
1458
     * so that elements tend to be in the 128-element direct access window
1459
     * on Arm Thumb, which reduces the code size. */
1460
1461
    mbedtls_ssl_protocol_version MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(max_tls_version);  /*!< max. TLS version used */
1462
    mbedtls_ssl_protocol_version MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(min_tls_version);  /*!< min. TLS version used */
1463
1464
    /*
1465
     * Flags (could be bit-fields to save RAM, but separate bytes make
1466
     * the code smaller on architectures with an instruction for direct
1467
     * byte access).
1468
     */
1469
1470
    uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(endpoint);      /*!< 0: client, 1: server               */
1471
    uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(transport);     /*!< 0: stream (TLS), 1: datagram (DTLS)    */
1472
    uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(authmode);      /*!< MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_XXX             */
1473
    /* needed even with renego disabled for LEGACY_BREAK_HANDSHAKE          */
1474
    uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(allow_legacy_renegotiation); /*!< MBEDTLS_LEGACY_XXX   */
1475
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAGMENT_LENGTH)
1476
    uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(mfl_code);      /*!< desired fragment length indicator
1477
                                                 (MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAG_LEN_XXX) */
1478
#endif
1479
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_ENCRYPT_THEN_MAC)
1480
    uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(encrypt_then_mac); /*!< negotiate encrypt-then-mac?    */
1481
#endif
1482
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_EXTENDED_MASTER_SECRET)
1483
    uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(extended_ms);   /*!< negotiate extended master secret?  */
1484
#endif
1485
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_ANTI_REPLAY)
1486
    uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(anti_replay);   /*!< detect and prevent replay?         */
1487
#endif
1488
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION)
1489
    uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(disable_renegotiation); /*!< disable renegotiation?     */
1490
#endif
1491
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS) && \
1492
    defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C)
1493
    /** Encodes two booleans, one stating whether TLS 1.2 session tickets are
1494
     *  enabled or not, the other one whether the handling of TLS 1.3
1495
     *  NewSessionTicket messages is enabled or not. They are respectively set
1496
     *  by mbedtls_ssl_conf_session_tickets() and
1497
     *  mbedtls_ssl_conf_tls13_enable_signal_new_session_tickets().
1498
     */
1499
    uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(session_tickets);   /*!< use session tickets? */
1500
#endif
1501
1502
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS) && \
1503
    defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C) && \
1504
    defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3)
1505
    uint16_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(new_session_tickets_count);   /*!< number of NewSessionTicket */
1506
#endif
1507
1508
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
1509
    uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(cert_req_ca_list);  /*!< enable sending CA list in
1510
                                                     Certificate Request messages? */
1511
    uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(respect_cli_pref);  /*!< pick the ciphersuite according to
1512
                                                     the client's preferences rather
1513
                                                     than ours? */
1514
#endif
1515
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID)
1516
    uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(ignore_unexpected_cid); /*!< Should DTLS record with
1517
                                                     *   unexpected CID
1518
                                                     *   lead to failure? */
1519
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID */
1520
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_SRTP)
1521
    uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(dtls_srtp_mki_support); /* support having mki_value
1522
                                                       in the use_srtp extension? */
1523
#endif
1524
1525
    /*
1526
     * Pointers
1527
     */
1528
1529
    /** Allowed ciphersuites for (D)TLS 1.2 (0-terminated)                  */
1530
    const int *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(ciphersuite_list);
1531
1532
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3)
1533
    /** Allowed TLS 1.3 key exchange modes.                                 */
1534
    int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(tls13_kex_modes);
1535
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3 */
1536
1537
    /** Callback for printing debug output                                  */
1538
    void(*MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_dbg))(void *, int, const char *, int, const char *);
1539
    void *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(p_dbg);                    /*!< context for the debug function     */
1540
1541
    /** Callback for getting (pseudo-)random numbers                        */
1542
    int(*MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_rng))(void *, unsigned char *, size_t);
1543
    void *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(p_rng);                    /*!< context for the RNG function       */
1544
1545
    /** Callback to retrieve a session from the cache                       */
1546
    mbedtls_ssl_cache_get_t *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_get_cache);
1547
    /** Callback to store a session into the cache                          */
1548
    mbedtls_ssl_cache_set_t *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_set_cache);
1549
    void *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(p_cache);                  /*!< context for cache callbacks        */
1550
1551
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SERVER_NAME_INDICATION)
1552
    /** Callback for setting cert according to SNI extension                */
1553
    int(*MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_sni))(void *, mbedtls_ssl_context *, const unsigned char *, size_t);
1554
    void *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(p_sni);                    /*!< context for SNI callback           */
1555
#endif
1556
1557
#if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C)
1558
    /** Callback to customize X.509 certificate chain verification          */
1559
    int(*MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_vrfy))(void *, mbedtls_x509_crt *, int, uint32_t *);
1560
    void *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(p_vrfy);                   /*!< context for X.509 verify calllback */
1561
#endif
1562
1563
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_HANDSHAKE_WITH_PSK_ENABLED)
1564
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
1565
    /** Callback to retrieve PSK key from identity                          */
1566
    int(*MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_psk))(void *, mbedtls_ssl_context *, const unsigned char *, size_t);
1567
    void *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(p_psk);                    /*!< context for PSK callback           */
1568
#endif
1569
#endif
1570
1571
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_HELLO_VERIFY) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
1572
    /** Callback to create & write a cookie for ClientHello verification    */
1573
    int(*MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_cookie_write))(void *, unsigned char **, unsigned char *,
1574
                                          const unsigned char *, size_t);
1575
    /** Callback to verify validity of a ClientHello cookie                 */
1576
    int(*MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_cookie_check))(void *, const unsigned char *, size_t,
1577
                                          const unsigned char *, size_t);
1578
    void *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(p_cookie);                 /*!< context for the cookie callbacks   */
1579
#endif
1580
1581
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
1582
    /** Callback to create & write a session ticket                         */
1583
    int(*MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_ticket_write))(void *, const mbedtls_ssl_session *,
1584
                                          unsigned char *, const unsigned char *, size_t *,
1585
                                          uint32_t *);
1586
    /** Callback to parse a session ticket into a session structure         */
1587
    int(*MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_ticket_parse))(void *, mbedtls_ssl_session *, unsigned char *, size_t);
1588
    void *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(p_ticket);                 /*!< context for the ticket callbacks   */
1589
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS && MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C */
1590
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID)
1591
    size_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(cid_len); /*!< The length of CIDs for incoming DTLS records.      */
1592
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID */
1593
1594
#if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C)
1595
    const mbedtls_x509_crt_profile *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(cert_profile); /*!< verification profile */
1596
    mbedtls_ssl_key_cert *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(key_cert); /*!< own certificate/key pair(s)        */
1597
    mbedtls_x509_crt *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(ca_chain);     /*!< trusted CAs                        */
1598
    mbedtls_x509_crl *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(ca_crl);       /*!< trusted CAs CRLs                   */
1599
#if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_TRUSTED_CERTIFICATE_CALLBACK)
1600
    mbedtls_x509_crt_ca_cb_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_ca_cb);
1601
    void *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(p_ca_cb);
1602
#endif /* MBEDTLS_X509_TRUSTED_CERTIFICATE_CALLBACK */
1603
#endif /* MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C */
1604
1605
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_ASYNC_PRIVATE)
1606
#if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C)
1607
    mbedtls_ssl_async_sign_t *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_async_sign_start); /*!< start asynchronous signature operation */
1608
    mbedtls_ssl_async_decrypt_t *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_async_decrypt_start); /*!< start asynchronous decryption operation */
1609
#endif /* MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C */
1610
    mbedtls_ssl_async_resume_t *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_async_resume); /*!< resume asynchronous operation */
1611
    mbedtls_ssl_async_cancel_t *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_async_cancel); /*!< cancel asynchronous operation */
1612
    void *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(p_async_config_data); /*!< Configuration data set by mbedtls_ssl_conf_async_private_cb(). */
1613
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_ASYNC_PRIVATE */
1614
1615
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_HANDSHAKE_WITH_CERT_ENABLED)
1616
1617
#if !defined(MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED_REMOVED)
1618
    const int *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(sig_hashes);         /*!< allowed signature hashes           */
1619
#endif
1620
    const uint16_t *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(sig_algs);      /*!< allowed signature algorithms       */
1621
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_HANDSHAKE_WITH_CERT_ENABLED */
1622
1623
#if defined(MBEDTLS_ECP_C) && !defined(MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED_REMOVED)
1624
    const mbedtls_ecp_group_id *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(curve_list); /*!< allowed curves             */
1625
#endif
1626
1627
    const uint16_t *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(group_list);     /*!< allowed IANA NamedGroups */
1628
1629
#if defined(MBEDTLS_DHM_C)
1630
    mbedtls_mpi MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(dhm_P);              /*!< prime modulus for DHM              */
1631
    mbedtls_mpi MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(dhm_G);              /*!< generator for DHM                  */
1632
#endif
1633
1634
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_HANDSHAKE_WITH_PSK_ENABLED)
1635
1636
#if defined(MBEDTLS_USE_PSA_CRYPTO)
1637
    mbedtls_svc_key_id_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(psk_opaque); /*!< PSA key slot holding opaque PSK. This field
1638
                                                       *   should only be set via
1639
                                                       *   mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk_opaque().
1640
                                                       *   If either no PSK or a raw PSK have been
1641
                                                       *   configured, this has value \c 0.
1642
                                                       */
1643
#endif /* MBEDTLS_USE_PSA_CRYPTO */
1644
    unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(psk);      /*!< The raw pre-shared key. This field should
1645
                                               *   only be set via mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk().
1646
                                               *   If either no PSK or an opaque PSK
1647
                                               *   have been configured, this has value NULL. */
1648
    size_t         MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(psk_len);  /*!< The length of the raw pre-shared key.
1649
                                               *   This field should only be set via
1650
                                               *   mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk().
1651
                                               *   Its value is non-zero if and only if
1652
                                               *   \c psk is not \c NULL. */
1653
1654
    unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(psk_identity);    /*!< The PSK identity for PSK negotiation.
1655
                                                      *   This field should only be set via
1656
                                                      *   mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk().
1657
                                                      *   This is set if and only if either
1658
                                                      *   \c psk or \c psk_opaque are set. */
1659
    size_t         MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(psk_identity_len);/*!< The length of PSK identity.
1660
                                                      *   This field should only be set via
1661
                                                      *   mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk().
1662
                                                      *   Its value is non-zero if and only if
1663
                                                      *   \c psk is not \c NULL or \c psk_opaque
1664
                                                      *   is not \c 0. */
1665
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_HANDSHAKE_WITH_PSK_ENABLED */
1666
1667
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA)
1668
    int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(early_data_enabled);     /*!< Early data enablement:
1669
                                                  *   - MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_DISABLED,
1670
                                                  *   - MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_ENABLED */
1671
1672
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
1673
    /* The maximum amount of 0-RTT data. RFC 8446 section 4.6.1 */
1674
    uint32_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(max_early_data_size);
1675
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C */
1676
1677
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA */
1678
1679
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_ALPN)
1680
    const char **MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(alpn_list);         /*!< ordered list of protocols          */
1681
#endif
1682
1683
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_SRTP)
1684
    /*! ordered list of supported srtp profile */
1685
    const mbedtls_ssl_srtp_profile *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(dtls_srtp_profile_list);
1686
    /*! number of supported profiles */
1687
    size_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(dtls_srtp_profile_list_len);
1688
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_SRTP */
1689
1690
    /*
1691
     * Numerical settings (int)
1692
     */
1693
1694
    uint32_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(read_timeout);          /*!< timeout for mbedtls_ssl_read (ms)  */
1695
1696
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_DTLS)
1697
    uint32_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(hs_timeout_min);        /*!< initial value of the handshake
1698
                                                        retransmission timeout (ms)        */
1699
    uint32_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(hs_timeout_max);        /*!< maximum value of the handshake
1700
                                                        retransmission timeout (ms)        */
1701
#endif
1702
1703
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION)
1704
    int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(renego_max_records);         /*!< grace period for renegotiation     */
1705
    unsigned char MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(renego_period)[8]; /*!< value of the record counters
1706
                                                        that triggers renegotiation        */
1707
#endif
1708
1709
    unsigned int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(badmac_limit);      /*!< limit of records with a bad MAC    */
1710
1711
#if defined(MBEDTLS_DHM_C) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C)
1712
    unsigned int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(dhm_min_bitlen);    /*!< min. bit length of the DHM prime   */
1713
#endif
1714
1715
    /** User data pointer or handle.
1716
     *
1717
     * The library sets this to \p 0 when creating a context and does not
1718
     * access it afterwards.
1719
     */
1720
    mbedtls_ssl_user_data_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(user_data);
1721
1722
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
1723
    mbedtls_ssl_hs_cb_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_cert_cb);  /*!< certificate selection callback */
1724
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C */
1725
1726
#if defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_CERT_REQ_ALLOWED_ENABLED)
1727
    const mbedtls_x509_crt *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(dn_hints);/*!< acceptable client cert issuers    */
1728
#endif
1729
};
1730
1731
struct mbedtls_ssl_context {
1732
    const mbedtls_ssl_config *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(conf); /*!< configuration information          */
1733
1734
    /*
1735
     * Miscellaneous
1736
     */
1737
    int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(state);                  /*!< SSL handshake: current state     */
1738
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION)
1739
    int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(renego_status);          /*!< Initial, in progress, pending?   */
1740
    int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(renego_records_seen);    /*!< Records since renego request, or with DTLS,
1741
                                                    number of retransmissions of request if
1742
                                                    renego_max_records is < 0           */
1743
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION */
1744
1745
    /**
1746
     * Maximum TLS version to be negotiated, then negotiated TLS version.
1747
     *
1748
     * It is initialized as the configured maximum TLS version to be
1749
     * negotiated by mbedtls_ssl_setup().
1750
     *
1751
     * When renegotiating or resuming a session, it is overwritten in the
1752
     * ClientHello writing preparation stage with the previously negotiated
1753
     * TLS version.
1754
     *
1755
     * On client side, it is updated to the TLS version selected by the server
1756
     * for the handshake when the ServerHello is received.
1757
     *
1758
     * On server side, it is updated to the TLS version the server selects for
1759
     * the handshake when the ClientHello is received.
1760
     */
1761
    mbedtls_ssl_protocol_version MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(tls_version);
1762
1763
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C)
1764
    /**
1765
     * State of the negotiation and transfer of early data. Reset to
1766
     * MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_STATE_IDLE when the context is reset.
1767
     */
1768
    int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(early_data_state);
1769
#endif
1770
1771
    /** Multipurpose field.
1772
     *
1773
     * - DTLS: records with a bad MAC received.
1774
     * - TLS: accumulated length of handshake fragments (up to \c in_hslen).
1775
     *
1776
     * This field is multipurpose in order to preserve the ABI in the
1777
     * Mbed TLS 3.6 LTS branch. Until 3.6.2, it was only used in DTLS
1778
     * and called `badmac_seen`.
1779
     */
1780
    unsigned MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(badmac_seen_or_in_hsfraglen);
1781
1782
#if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C)
1783
    /** Callback to customize X.509 certificate chain verification          */
1784
    int(*MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_vrfy))(void *, mbedtls_x509_crt *, int, uint32_t *);
1785
    void *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(p_vrfy);                   /*!< context for X.509 verify callback */
1786
#endif
1787
1788
    mbedtls_ssl_send_t *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_send); /*!< Callback for network send */
1789
    mbedtls_ssl_recv_t *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_recv); /*!< Callback for network receive */
1790
    mbedtls_ssl_recv_timeout_t *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_recv_timeout);
1791
    /*!< Callback for network receive with timeout */
1792
1793
    void *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(p_bio);                /*!< context for I/O operations   */
1794
1795
    /*
1796
     * Session layer
1797
     */
1798
    mbedtls_ssl_session *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(session_in);            /*!<  current session data (in)   */
1799
    mbedtls_ssl_session *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(session_out);           /*!<  current session data (out)  */
1800
    mbedtls_ssl_session *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(session);               /*!<  negotiated session data     */
1801
    mbedtls_ssl_session *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(session_negotiate);     /*!<  session data in negotiation */
1802
1803
    mbedtls_ssl_handshake_params *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(handshake);    /*!<  params required only during
1804
                                                                    the handshake process        */
1805
1806
    /*
1807
     * Record layer transformations
1808
     */
1809
    mbedtls_ssl_transform *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(transform_in);        /*!<  current transform params (in)
1810
                                                                  *    This is always a reference,
1811
                                                                  *    never an owning pointer.        */
1812
    mbedtls_ssl_transform *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(transform_out);       /*!<  current transform params (out)
1813
                                                                  *    This is always a reference,
1814
                                                                  *    never an owning pointer.        */
1815
    mbedtls_ssl_transform *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(transform);           /*!<  negotiated transform params
1816
                                                                  *    This pointer owns the transform
1817
                                                                  *    it references.                  */
1818
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_2)
1819
    mbedtls_ssl_transform *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(transform_negotiate); /*!<  transform params in negotiation
1820
                                                                  *    This pointer owns the transform
1821
                                                                  *    it references.                  */
1822
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_2 */
1823
1824
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3)
1825
    /*! The application data transform in TLS 1.3.
1826
     *  This pointer owns the transform it references. */
1827
    mbedtls_ssl_transform *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(transform_application);
1828
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3 */
1829
1830
    /*
1831
     * Timers
1832
     */
1833
    void *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(p_timer);              /*!< context for the timer callbacks */
1834
1835
    mbedtls_ssl_set_timer_t *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_set_timer);       /*!< set timer callback */
1836
    mbedtls_ssl_get_timer_t *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_get_timer);       /*!< get timer callback */
1837
1838
    /*
1839
     * Record layer (incoming data)
1840
     */
1841
    unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_buf);      /*!< input buffer                     */
1842
    unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_ctr);      /*!< 64-bit incoming message counter
1843
                                                    TLS: maintained by us
1844
                                                    DTLS: read from peer             */
1845
    unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_hdr);      /*!< start of record header           */
1846
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID)
1847
    unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_cid);      /*!< The start of the CID;
1848
                                                  *   (the end is marked by in_len).   */
1849
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID */
1850
    unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_len);      /*!< two-bytes message length field   */
1851
    unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_iv);       /*!< ivlen-byte IV                    */
1852
    unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_msg);      /*!< message contents (in_iv+ivlen)   */
1853
    unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_offt);     /*!< read offset in application data  */
1854
1855
    int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_msgtype);             /*!< record header: message type      */
1856
    size_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_msglen);           /*!< record header: message length    */
1857
    size_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_left);             /*!< amount of data read so far       */
1858
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_VARIABLE_BUFFER_LENGTH)
1859
    size_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_buf_len);          /*!< length of input buffer           */
1860
#endif
1861
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_DTLS)
1862
    uint16_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_epoch);          /*!< DTLS epoch for incoming records  */
1863
    size_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(next_record_offset);  /*!< offset of the next record in datagram
1864
                                                    (equal to in_left if none)       */
1865
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_DTLS */
1866
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_ANTI_REPLAY)
1867
    uint64_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_window_top);     /*!< last validated record seq_num    */
1868
    uint64_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_window);         /*!< bitmask for replay detection     */
1869
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_ANTI_REPLAY */
1870
1871
    size_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(in_hslen);            /*!< current handshake message length,
1872
                                                    including the handshake header   */
1873
    int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(nb_zero);                /*!< # of 0-length encrypted messages */
1874
1875
    int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(keep_current_message);   /*!< drop or reuse current message
1876
                                                    on next call to record layer? */
1877
1878
    /* The following three variables indicate if and, if yes,
1879
     * what kind of alert is pending to be sent.
1880
     */
1881
    unsigned char MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(send_alert);   /*!< Determines if a fatal alert
1882
                                                    should be sent. Values:
1883
                                                    - \c 0 , no alert is to be sent.
1884
                                                    - \c 1 , alert is to be sent. */
1885
    unsigned char MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(alert_type);   /*!< Type of alert if send_alert
1886
                                                    != 0 */
1887
    int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(alert_reason);           /*!< The error code to be returned
1888
                                                    to the user once the fatal alert
1889
                                                    has been sent. */
1890
1891
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_DTLS)
1892
    uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(disable_datagram_packing);  /*!< Disable packing multiple records
1893
                                                         *   within a single datagram.  */
1894
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_DTLS */
1895
1896
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA)
1897
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
1898
    /*
1899
     * One of:
1900
     * MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_NO_DISCARD
1901
     * MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_TRY_TO_DEPROTECT_AND_DISCARD
1902
     * MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_DISCARD
1903
     */
1904
    uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(discard_early_data_record);
1905
#endif
1906
    uint32_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(total_early_data_size); /*!< Number of received/written early data bytes */
1907
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA */
1908
1909
    /*
1910
     * Record layer (outgoing data)
1911
     */
1912
    unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(out_buf);     /*!< output buffer                    */
1913
    unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(out_ctr);     /*!< 64-bit outgoing message counter  */
1914
    unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(out_hdr);     /*!< start of record header           */
1915
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID)
1916
    unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(out_cid);     /*!< The start of the CID;
1917
                                                  *   (the end is marked by in_len).   */
1918
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID */
1919
    unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(out_len);     /*!< two-bytes message length field   */
1920
    unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(out_iv);      /*!< ivlen-byte IV                    */
1921
    unsigned char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(out_msg);     /*!< message contents (out_iv+ivlen)  */
1922
1923
    int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(out_msgtype);            /*!< record header: message type      */
1924
    size_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(out_msglen);          /*!< record header: message length    */
1925
    size_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(out_left);            /*!< amount of data not yet written   */
1926
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_VARIABLE_BUFFER_LENGTH)
1927
    size_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(out_buf_len);         /*!< length of output buffer          */
1928
#endif
1929
1930
    unsigned char MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(cur_out_ctr)[MBEDTLS_SSL_SEQUENCE_NUMBER_LEN]; /*!<  Outgoing record sequence  number. */
1931
1932
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_DTLS)
1933
    uint16_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(mtu);               /*!< path mtu, used to fragment outgoing messages */
1934
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_DTLS */
1935
1936
    /*
1937
     * User settings
1938
     */
1939
#if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C)
1940
    /** Expected peer CN for verification.
1941
     *
1942
     * Also used on clients for SNI,
1943
     * and for TLS 1.3 session resumption using tickets.
1944
     *
1945
     * The value of this field can be:
1946
     * - \p NULL in a newly initialized or reset context.
1947
     * - A heap-allocated copy of the last value passed to
1948
     *   mbedtls_ssl_set_hostname(), if the last call had a non-null
1949
     *  \p hostname argument.
1950
     * - A special value to indicate that mbedtls_ssl_set_hostname()
1951
     *   was called with \p NULL (as opposed to never having been called).
1952
     *   See `mbedtls_ssl_get_hostname_pointer()` in `ssl_tls.c`.
1953
     *
1954
     * If this field contains the value \p NULL and the configuration option
1955
     * #MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_ALLOW_WEAK_CERTIFICATE_VERIFICATION_WITHOUT_HOSTNAME
1956
     * is unset, on a TLS client, attempting to verify a server certificate
1957
     * results in the error
1958
     * #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CERTIFICATE_VERIFICATION_WITHOUT_HOSTNAME.
1959
     *
1960
     * If this field contains the special value described above, or if
1961
     * the value is \p NULL and the configuration option
1962
     * #MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_ALLOW_WEAK_CERTIFICATE_VERIFICATION_WITHOUT_HOSTNAME
1963
     * is set, then the peer name verification is skipped, which may be
1964
     * insecure, especially on a client. Furthermore, on a client, the
1965
     * server_name extension is not sent, and the server name is ignored
1966
     * in TLS 1.3 session resumption using tickets.
1967
     */
1968
    char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(hostname);
1969
#endif /* MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C */
1970
1971
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_ALPN)
1972
    const char *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(alpn_chosen);    /*!<  negotiated protocol                   */
1973
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_ALPN */
1974
1975
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_SRTP)
1976
    /*
1977
     * use_srtp extension
1978
     */
1979
    mbedtls_dtls_srtp_info MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(dtls_srtp_info);
1980
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_SRTP */
1981
1982
    /*
1983
     * Information for DTLS hello verify
1984
     */
1985
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_HELLO_VERIFY) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
1986
    unsigned char  *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(cli_id);         /*!<  transport-level ID of the client  */
1987
    size_t          MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(cli_id_len);     /*!<  length of cli_id                  */
1988
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_HELLO_VERIFY && MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C */
1989
1990
    /*
1991
     * Secure renegotiation
1992
     */
1993
    /* needed to know when to send extension on server */
1994
    int MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(secure_renegotiation);           /*!<  does peer support legacy or
1995
                                                            secure renegotiation           */
1996
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION)
1997
    size_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(verify_data_len);             /*!<  length of verify data stored   */
1998
    char MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(own_verify_data)[MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_DATA_MAX_LEN]; /*!<  previous handshake verify data */
1999
    char MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(peer_verify_data)[MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_DATA_MAX_LEN]; /*!<  previous handshake verify data */
2000
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION */
2001
2002
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID)
2003
    /* CID configuration to use in subsequent handshakes. */
2004
2005
    /*! The next incoming CID, chosen by the user and applying to
2006
     *  all subsequent handshakes. This may be different from the
2007
     *  CID currently used in case the user has re-configured the CID
2008
     *  after an initial handshake. */
2009
    unsigned char MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(own_cid)[MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_IN_LEN_MAX];
2010
    uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(own_cid_len);   /*!< The length of \c own_cid. */
2011
    uint8_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(negotiate_cid); /*!< This indicates whether the CID extension should
2012
                                             *   be negotiated in the next handshake or not.
2013
                                             *   Possible values are #MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_ENABLED
2014
                                             *   and #MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_DISABLED. */
2015
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID */
2016
2017
    /** Callback to export key block and master secret                      */
2018
    mbedtls_ssl_export_keys_t *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_export_keys);
2019
    void *MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(p_export_keys);            /*!< context for key export callback    */
2020
2021
    /** User data pointer or handle.
2022
     *
2023
     * The library sets this to \p 0 when creating a context and does not
2024
     * access it afterwards.
2025
     *
2026
     * \warning Serializing and restoring an SSL context with
2027
     *          mbedtls_ssl_context_save() and mbedtls_ssl_context_load()
2028
     *          does not currently restore the user data.
2029
     */
2030
    mbedtls_ssl_user_data_t MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(user_data);
2031
};
2032
2033
/**
2034
 * \brief               Return the name of the ciphersuite associated with the
2035
 *                      given ID
2036
 *
2037
 * \param ciphersuite_id SSL ciphersuite ID
2038
 *
2039
 * \return              a string containing the ciphersuite name
2040
 */
2041
const char *mbedtls_ssl_get_ciphersuite_name(const int ciphersuite_id);
2042
2043
/**
2044
 * \brief               Return the ID of the ciphersuite associated with the
2045
 *                      given name
2046
 *
2047
 * \param ciphersuite_name SSL ciphersuite name
2048
 *
2049
 * \return              the ID with the ciphersuite or 0 if not found
2050
 */
2051
int mbedtls_ssl_get_ciphersuite_id(const char *ciphersuite_name);
2052
2053
/**
2054
 * \brief          Initialize an SSL context
2055
 *                 Just makes the context ready for mbedtls_ssl_setup() or
2056
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_free()
2057
 *
2058
 * \param ssl      SSL context
2059
 */
2060
void mbedtls_ssl_init(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
2061
2062
/**
2063
 * \brief          Set up an SSL context for use
2064
 *
2065
 * \note           No copy of the configuration context is made, it can be
2066
 *                 shared by many mbedtls_ssl_context structures.
2067
 *
2068
 * \warning        The conf structure will be accessed during the session.
2069
 *                 It must not be modified or freed as long as the session
2070
 *                 is active.
2071
 *
2072
 * \warning        This function must be called exactly once per context.
2073
 *                 Calling mbedtls_ssl_setup again is not supported, even
2074
 *                 if no session is active.
2075
 *
2076
 * \warning        After setting up a client context, if certificate-based
2077
 *                 authentication is enabled, you should call
2078
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_set_hostname() to specifiy the expected
2079
 *                 name of the server. Without this, in most scenarios,
2080
 *                 the TLS connection is insecure. See
2081
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CERTIFICATE_VERIFICATION_WITHOUT_HOSTNAME
2082
 *                 for more information.
2083
 *
2084
 * \note           If #MBEDTLS_USE_PSA_CRYPTO is enabled, the PSA crypto
2085
 *                 subsystem must have been initialized by calling
2086
 *                 psa_crypto_init() before calling this function.
2087
 *
2088
 * \param ssl      SSL context
2089
 * \param conf     SSL configuration to use
2090
 *
2091
 * \return         0 if successful, or MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ALLOC_FAILED if
2092
 *                 memory allocation failed
2093
 */
2094
int mbedtls_ssl_setup(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
2095
                      const mbedtls_ssl_config *conf);
2096
2097
/**
2098
 * \brief          Reset an already initialized SSL context for re-use
2099
 *                 while retaining application-set variables, function
2100
 *                 pointers and data.
2101
 *
2102
 * \param ssl      SSL context
2103
 * \return         0 if successful, or MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ALLOC_FAILED or
2104
                   MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_HW_ACCEL_FAILED
2105
 */
2106
int mbedtls_ssl_session_reset(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
2107
2108
/**
2109
 * \brief          Set the current endpoint type
2110
 *
2111
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
2112
 * \param endpoint must be MBEDTLS_SSL_IS_CLIENT or MBEDTLS_SSL_IS_SERVER
2113
 */
2114
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_endpoint(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, int endpoint);
2115
2116
/**
2117
 * \brief          Get the current endpoint type
2118
 *
2119
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
2120
 *
2121
 * \return         Endpoint type, either MBEDTLS_SSL_IS_CLIENT
2122
 *                 or MBEDTLS_SSL_IS_SERVER
2123
 */
2124
static inline int mbedtls_ssl_conf_get_endpoint(const mbedtls_ssl_config *conf)
2125
0
{
2126
0
    return conf->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(endpoint);
2127
0
}
2128
2129
/**
2130
 * \brief           Set the transport type (TLS or DTLS).
2131
 *                  Default: TLS
2132
 *
2133
 * \note            For DTLS, you must either provide a recv callback that
2134
 *                  doesn't block, or one that handles timeouts, see
2135
 *                  \c mbedtls_ssl_set_bio(). You also need to provide timer
2136
 *                  callbacks with \c mbedtls_ssl_set_timer_cb().
2137
 *
2138
 * \param conf      SSL configuration
2139
 * \param transport transport type:
2140
 *                  MBEDTLS_SSL_TRANSPORT_STREAM for TLS,
2141
 *                  MBEDTLS_SSL_TRANSPORT_DATAGRAM for DTLS.
2142
 */
2143
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_transport(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, int transport);
2144
2145
/**
2146
 * \brief          Set the certificate verification mode
2147
 *                 Default: NONE on server, REQUIRED on client
2148
 *
2149
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
2150
 * \param authmode can be:
2151
 *
2152
 *  MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_NONE:      peer certificate is not checked
2153
 *                        (default on server)
2154
 *                        (insecure on client)
2155
 *
2156
 *  MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_OPTIONAL:  peer certificate is checked, however the
2157
 *                        handshake continues even if verification failed;
2158
 *                        mbedtls_ssl_get_verify_result() can be called after the
2159
 *                        handshake is complete.
2160
 *
2161
 *  MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_REQUIRED:  peer *must* present a valid certificate,
2162
 *                        handshake is aborted if verification failed.
2163
 *                        (default on client)
2164
 *
2165
 * \note On client, MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_REQUIRED is the recommended mode.
2166
 * With MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_OPTIONAL, the user needs to call mbedtls_ssl_get_verify_result() at
2167
 * the right time(s), which may not be obvious, while REQUIRED always perform
2168
 * the verification as soon as possible. For example, REQUIRED was protecting
2169
 * against the "triple handshake" attack even before it was found.
2170
 */
2171
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_authmode(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, int authmode);
2172
2173
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA)
2174
/**
2175
 * \brief    Set the early data mode
2176
 *           Default: disabled on server and client
2177
 *
2178
 * \param conf   The SSL configuration to use.
2179
 * \param early_data_enabled can be:
2180
 *
2181
 *  MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_DISABLED:
2182
 *  Early data functionality is disabled. This is the default on client and
2183
 *  server.
2184
 *
2185
 *  MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_ENABLED:
2186
 *  Early data functionality is enabled and may be negotiated in the handshake.
2187
 *  Application using early data functionality needs to be aware that the
2188
 *  security properties for early data (also refered to as 0-RTT data) are
2189
 *  weaker than those for other kinds of TLS data. See the documentation of
2190
 *  mbedtls_ssl_write_early_data() and mbedtls_ssl_read_early_data() for more
2191
 *  information.
2192
 *  When early data functionality is enabled on server and only in that case,
2193
 *  the call to one of the APIs that trigger or resume an handshake sequence,
2194
 *  namely mbedtls_ssl_handshake(), mbedtls_ssl_handshake_step(),
2195
 *  mbedtls_ssl_read() or mbedtls_ssl_write() may return with the error code
2196
 *  MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_EARLY_DATA indicating that some early data have
2197
 *  been received. To read the early data, call mbedtls_ssl_read_early_data()
2198
 *  before calling the original function again.
2199
 */
2200
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_early_data(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
2201
                                 int early_data_enabled);
2202
2203
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
2204
/**
2205
 * \brief Set the maximum amount of 0-RTT data in bytes
2206
 *        Default:  #MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_EARLY_DATA_SIZE
2207
 *
2208
 *        This function sets the value of the max_early_data_size
2209
 *        field of the early data indication extension included in
2210
 *        the NewSessionTicket messages that the server may send.
2211
 *
2212
 *        The value defines the maximum amount of 0-RTT data
2213
 *        in bytes that a client will be allowed to send when using
2214
 *        one of the tickets defined by the NewSessionTicket messages.
2215
 *
2216
 * \note When resuming a session using a ticket, if the server receives more
2217
 *       early data than allowed for the ticket, it terminates the connection.
2218
 *       The maximum amount of 0-RTT data should thus be large enough
2219
 *       to allow a minimum of early data to be exchanged.
2220
 *
2221
 * \param[in] conf                  The SSL configuration to use.
2222
 * \param[in] max_early_data_size   The maximum amount of 0-RTT data.
2223
 *
2224
 * \warning This interface DOES NOT influence/limit the amount of early data
2225
 *          that can be received through previously created and issued tickets,
2226
 *          which clients may have stored.
2227
 */
2228
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_max_early_data_size(
2229
    mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, uint32_t max_early_data_size);
2230
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C */
2231
2232
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA */
2233
2234
#if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C)
2235
/**
2236
 * \brief          Set the verification callback (Optional).
2237
 *
2238
 *                 If set, the provided verify callback is called for each
2239
 *                 certificate in the peer's CRT chain, including the trusted
2240
 *                 root. For more information, please see the documentation of
2241
 *                 \c mbedtls_x509_crt_verify().
2242
 *
2243
 * \note           For per context callbacks and contexts, please use
2244
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_set_verify() instead.
2245
 *
2246
 * \param conf     The SSL configuration to use.
2247
 * \param f_vrfy   The verification callback to use during CRT verification.
2248
 * \param p_vrfy   The opaque context to be passed to the callback.
2249
 */
2250
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_verify(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
2251
                             int (*f_vrfy)(void *, mbedtls_x509_crt *, int, uint32_t *),
2252
                             void *p_vrfy);
2253
#endif /* MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C */
2254
2255
/**
2256
 * \brief          Set the random number generator callback
2257
 *
2258
 * \note           The callback with its parameter must remain valid as
2259
 *                 long as there is an SSL context that uses the
2260
 *                 SSL configuration.
2261
 *
2262
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
2263
 * \param f_rng    RNG function (mandatory)
2264
 * \param p_rng    RNG parameter
2265
 */
2266
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_rng(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
2267
                          mbedtls_f_rng_t *f_rng,
2268
                          void *p_rng);
2269
2270
/**
2271
 * \brief          Set the debug callback
2272
 *
2273
 *                 The callback has the following argument:
2274
 *                 void *           opaque context for the callback
2275
 *                 int              debug level
2276
 *                 const char *     file name
2277
 *                 int              line number
2278
 *                 const char *     message
2279
 *
2280
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
2281
 * \param f_dbg    debug function
2282
 * \param p_dbg    debug parameter
2283
 */
2284
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_dbg(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
2285
                          void (*f_dbg)(void *, int, const char *, int, const char *),
2286
                          void  *p_dbg);
2287
2288
/**
2289
 * \brief          Return the SSL configuration structure associated
2290
 *                 with the given SSL context.
2291
 *
2292
 * \note           The pointer returned by this function is guaranteed to
2293
 *                 remain valid until the context is freed.
2294
 *
2295
 * \param ssl      The SSL context to query.
2296
 * \return         Pointer to the SSL configuration associated with \p ssl.
2297
 */
2298
static inline const mbedtls_ssl_config *mbedtls_ssl_context_get_config(
2299
    const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl)
2300
0
{
2301
0
    return ssl->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(conf);
2302
0
}
2303
2304
/**
2305
 * \brief          Set the underlying BIO callbacks for write, read and
2306
 *                 read-with-timeout.
2307
 *
2308
 * \param ssl      SSL context
2309
 * \param p_bio    parameter (context) shared by BIO callbacks
2310
 * \param f_send   write callback
2311
 * \param f_recv   read callback
2312
 * \param f_recv_timeout blocking read callback with timeout.
2313
 *
2314
 * \note           One of f_recv or f_recv_timeout can be NULL, in which case
2315
 *                 the other is used. If both are non-NULL, f_recv_timeout is
2316
 *                 used and f_recv is ignored (as if it were NULL).
2317
 *
2318
 * \note           The two most common use cases are:
2319
 *                 - non-blocking I/O, f_recv != NULL, f_recv_timeout == NULL
2320
 *                 - blocking I/O, f_recv == NULL, f_recv_timeout != NULL
2321
 *
2322
 * \note           For DTLS, you need to provide either a non-NULL
2323
 *                 f_recv_timeout callback, or a f_recv that doesn't block.
2324
 *
2325
 * \note           See the documentations of \c mbedtls_ssl_send_t,
2326
 *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_recv_t and \c mbedtls_ssl_recv_timeout_t for
2327
 *                 the conventions those callbacks must follow.
2328
 *
2329
 * \note           On some platforms, net_sockets.c provides
2330
 *                 \c mbedtls_net_send(), \c mbedtls_net_recv() and
2331
 *                 \c mbedtls_net_recv_timeout() that are suitable to be used
2332
 *                 here.
2333
 */
2334
void mbedtls_ssl_set_bio(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
2335
                         void *p_bio,
2336
                         mbedtls_ssl_send_t *f_send,
2337
                         mbedtls_ssl_recv_t *f_recv,
2338
                         mbedtls_ssl_recv_timeout_t *f_recv_timeout);
2339
2340
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_DTLS)
2341
2342
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID)
2343
2344
2345
/**
2346
 * \brief             Configure the use of the Connection ID (CID)
2347
 *                    extension in the next handshake.
2348
 *
2349
 *                    Reference: RFC 9146 (or draft-ietf-tls-dtls-connection-id-05
2350
 *                    https://tools.ietf.org/html/draft-ietf-tls-dtls-connection-id-05
2351
 *                    for legacy version)
2352
 *
2353
 *                    The DTLS CID extension allows the reliable association of
2354
 *                    DTLS records to DTLS connections across changes in the
2355
 *                    underlying transport (changed IP and Port metadata) by
2356
 *                    adding explicit connection identifiers (CIDs) to the
2357
 *                    headers of encrypted DTLS records. The desired CIDs are
2358
 *                    configured by the application layer and are exchanged in
2359
 *                    new `ClientHello` / `ServerHello` extensions during the
2360
 *                    handshake, where each side indicates the CID it wants the
2361
 *                    peer to use when writing encrypted messages. The CIDs are
2362
 *                    put to use once records get encrypted: the stack discards
2363
 *                    any incoming records that don't include the configured CID
2364
 *                    in their header, and adds the peer's requested CID to the
2365
 *                    headers of outgoing messages.
2366
 *
2367
 *                    This API enables or disables the use of the CID extension
2368
 *                    in the next handshake and sets the value of the CID to
2369
 *                    be used for incoming messages.
2370
 *
2371
 * \param ssl         The SSL context to configure. This must be initialized.
2372
 * \param enable      This value determines whether the CID extension should
2373
 *                    be used or not. Possible values are:
2374
 *                    - MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_ENABLED to enable the use of the CID.
2375
 *                    - MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_DISABLED (default) to disable the use
2376
 *                      of the CID.
2377
 * \param own_cid     The address of the readable buffer holding the CID we want
2378
 *                    the peer to use when sending encrypted messages to us.
2379
 *                    This may be \c NULL if \p own_cid_len is \c 0.
2380
 *                    This parameter is unused if \p enable is set to
2381
 *                    MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_DISABLED.
2382
 * \param own_cid_len The length of \p own_cid.
2383
 *                    This parameter is unused if \p enable is set to
2384
 *                    MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_DISABLED.
2385
 *
2386
 * \note              The value of \p own_cid_len must match the value of the
2387
 *                    \c len parameter passed to mbedtls_ssl_conf_cid()
2388
 *                    when configuring the ::mbedtls_ssl_config that \p ssl
2389
 *                    is bound to.
2390
 *
2391
 * \note              This CID configuration applies to subsequent handshakes
2392
 *                    performed on the SSL context \p ssl, but does not trigger
2393
 *                    one. You still have to call `mbedtls_ssl_handshake()`
2394
 *                    (for the initial handshake) or `mbedtls_ssl_renegotiate()`
2395
 *                    (for a renegotiation handshake) explicitly after a
2396
 *                    successful call to this function to run the handshake.
2397
 *
2398
 * \note              This call cannot guarantee that the use of the CID
2399
 *                    will be successfully negotiated in the next handshake,
2400
 *                    because the peer might not support it. Specifically:
2401
 *                    - On the Client, enabling the use of the CID through
2402
 *                      this call implies that the `ClientHello` in the next
2403
 *                      handshake will include the CID extension, thereby
2404
 *                      offering the use of the CID to the server. Only if
2405
 *                      the `ServerHello` contains the CID extension, too,
2406
 *                      the CID extension will actually be put to use.
2407
 *                    - On the Server, enabling the use of the CID through
2408
 *                      this call implies that the server will look for
2409
 *                      the CID extension in a `ClientHello` from the client,
2410
 *                      and, if present, reply with a CID extension in its
2411
 *                      `ServerHello`.
2412
 *
2413
 * \note              To check whether the use of the CID was negotiated
2414
 *                    after the subsequent handshake has completed, please
2415
 *                    use the API mbedtls_ssl_get_peer_cid().
2416
 *
2417
 * \warning           If the use of the CID extension is enabled in this call
2418
 *                    and the subsequent handshake negotiates its use, Mbed TLS
2419
 *                    will silently drop every packet whose CID does not match
2420
 *                    the CID configured in \p own_cid. It is the responsibility
2421
 *                    of the user to adapt the underlying transport to take care
2422
 *                    of CID-based demultiplexing before handing datagrams to
2423
 *                    Mbed TLS.
2424
 *
2425
 * \return            \c 0 on success. In this case, the CID configuration
2426
 *                    applies to the next handshake.
2427
 * \return            A negative error code on failure.
2428
 */
2429
int mbedtls_ssl_set_cid(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
2430
                        int enable,
2431
                        unsigned char const *own_cid,
2432
                        size_t own_cid_len);
2433
2434
/**
2435
 * \brief              Get information about our request for usage of the CID
2436
 *                     extension in the current connection.
2437
 *
2438
 * \param ssl          The SSL context to query.
2439
 * \param enabled      The address at which to store whether the CID extension
2440
 *                     is requested to be used or not. If the CID is
2441
 *                     requested, `*enabled` is set to
2442
 *                     MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_ENABLED; otherwise, it is set to
2443
 *                     MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_DISABLED.
2444
 * \param own_cid      The address of the buffer in which to store our own
2445
 *                     CID (if the CID extension is requested). This may be
2446
 *                     \c NULL in case the value of our CID isn't needed. If
2447
 *                     it is not \c NULL, \p own_cid_len must not be \c NULL.
2448
 * \param own_cid_len  The address at which to store the size of our own CID
2449
 *                     (if the CID extension is requested). This is also the
2450
 *                     number of Bytes in \p own_cid that have been written.
2451
 *                     This may be \c NULL in case the length of our own CID
2452
 *                     isn't needed. If it is \c NULL, \p own_cid must be
2453
 *                     \c NULL, too.
2454
 *
2455
 *\note                If we are requesting an empty CID this function sets
2456
 *                     `*enabled` to #MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_DISABLED (the rationale
2457
 *                     for this is that the resulting outcome is the
2458
 *                     same as if the CID extensions wasn't requested).
2459
 *
2460
 * \return            \c 0 on success.
2461
 * \return            A negative error code on failure.
2462
 */
2463
int mbedtls_ssl_get_own_cid(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
2464
                            int *enabled,
2465
                            unsigned char own_cid[MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_IN_LEN_MAX],
2466
                            size_t *own_cid_len);
2467
2468
/**
2469
 * \brief              Get information about the use of the CID extension
2470
 *                     in the current connection.
2471
 *
2472
 * \param ssl          The SSL context to query.
2473
 * \param enabled      The address at which to store whether the CID extension
2474
 *                     is currently in use or not. If the CID is in use,
2475
 *                     `*enabled` is set to MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_ENABLED;
2476
 *                     otherwise, it is set to MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_DISABLED.
2477
 * \param peer_cid     The address of the buffer in which to store the CID
2478
 *                     chosen by the peer (if the CID extension is used).
2479
 *                     This may be \c NULL in case the value of peer CID
2480
 *                     isn't needed. If it is not \c NULL, \p peer_cid_len
2481
 *                     must not be \c NULL.
2482
 * \param peer_cid_len The address at which to store the size of the CID
2483
 *                     chosen by the peer (if the CID extension is used).
2484
 *                     This is also the number of Bytes in \p peer_cid that
2485
 *                     have been written.
2486
 *                     This may be \c NULL in case the length of the peer CID
2487
 *                     isn't needed. If it is \c NULL, \p peer_cid must be
2488
 *                     \c NULL, too.
2489
 *
2490
 * \note               This applies to the state of the CID negotiated in
2491
 *                     the last complete handshake. If a handshake is in
2492
 *                     progress, this function will attempt to complete
2493
 *                     the handshake first.
2494
 *
2495
 * \note               If CID extensions have been exchanged but both client
2496
 *                     and server chose to use an empty CID, this function
2497
 *                     sets `*enabled` to #MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_DISABLED
2498
 *                     (the rationale for this is that the resulting
2499
 *                     communication is the same as if the CID extensions
2500
 *                     hadn't been used).
2501
 *
2502
 * \return            \c 0 on success.
2503
 * \return            A negative error code on failure.
2504
 */
2505
int mbedtls_ssl_get_peer_cid(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
2506
                             int *enabled,
2507
                             unsigned char peer_cid[MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_OUT_LEN_MAX],
2508
                             size_t *peer_cid_len);
2509
2510
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID */
2511
2512
/**
2513
 * \brief          Set the Maximum Transport Unit (MTU).
2514
 *                 Special value: 0 means unset (no limit).
2515
 *                 This represents the maximum size of a datagram payload
2516
 *                 handled by the transport layer (usually UDP) as determined
2517
 *                 by the network link and stack. In practice, this controls
2518
 *                 the maximum size datagram the DTLS layer will pass to the
2519
 *                 \c f_send() callback set using \c mbedtls_ssl_set_bio().
2520
 *
2521
 * \note           The limit on datagram size is converted to a limit on
2522
 *                 record payload by subtracting the current overhead of
2523
 *                 encapsulation and encryption/authentication if any.
2524
 *
2525
 * \note           This can be called at any point during the connection, for
2526
 *                 example when a Path Maximum Transfer Unit (PMTU)
2527
 *                 estimate becomes available from other sources,
2528
 *                 such as lower (or higher) protocol layers.
2529
 *
2530
 * \note           This setting only controls the size of the packets we send,
2531
 *                 and does not restrict the size of the datagrams we're
2532
 *                 willing to receive. Client-side, you can request the
2533
 *                 server to use smaller records with \c
2534
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_conf_max_frag_len().
2535
 *
2536
 * \note           If both a MTU and a maximum fragment length have been
2537
 *                 configured (or negotiated with the peer), the resulting
2538
 *                 lower limit on record payload (see first note) is used.
2539
 *
2540
 * \note           This can only be used to decrease the maximum size
2541
 *                 of datagrams (hence records, see first note) sent. It
2542
 *                 cannot be used to increase the maximum size of records over
2543
 *                 the limit set by #MBEDTLS_SSL_OUT_CONTENT_LEN.
2544
 *
2545
 * \note           Values lower than the current record layer expansion will
2546
 *                 result in an error when trying to send data.
2547
 *
2548
 * \param ssl      SSL context
2549
 * \param mtu      Value of the path MTU in bytes
2550
 */
2551
void mbedtls_ssl_set_mtu(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl, uint16_t mtu);
2552
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_DTLS */
2553
2554
#if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C)
2555
/**
2556
 * \brief          Set a connection-specific verification callback (optional).
2557
 *
2558
 *                 If set, the provided verify callback is called for each
2559
 *                 certificate in the peer's CRT chain, including the trusted
2560
 *                 root. For more information, please see the documentation of
2561
 *                 \c mbedtls_x509_crt_verify().
2562
 *
2563
 * \note           This call is analogous to mbedtls_ssl_conf_verify() but
2564
 *                 binds the verification callback and context to an SSL context
2565
 *                 as opposed to an SSL configuration.
2566
 *                 If mbedtls_ssl_conf_verify() and mbedtls_ssl_set_verify()
2567
 *                 are both used, mbedtls_ssl_set_verify() takes precedence.
2568
 *
2569
 * \param ssl      The SSL context to use.
2570
 * \param f_vrfy   The verification callback to use during CRT verification.
2571
 * \param p_vrfy   The opaque context to be passed to the callback.
2572
 */
2573
void mbedtls_ssl_set_verify(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
2574
                            int (*f_vrfy)(void *, mbedtls_x509_crt *, int, uint32_t *),
2575
                            void *p_vrfy);
2576
#endif /* MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C */
2577
2578
/**
2579
 * \brief          Set the timeout period for mbedtls_ssl_read()
2580
 *                 (Default: no timeout.)
2581
 *
2582
 * \param conf     SSL configuration context
2583
 * \param timeout  Timeout value in milliseconds.
2584
 *                 Use 0 for no timeout (default).
2585
 *
2586
 * \note           With blocking I/O, this will only work if a non-NULL
2587
 *                 \c f_recv_timeout was set with \c mbedtls_ssl_set_bio().
2588
 *                 With non-blocking I/O, this will only work if timer
2589
 *                 callbacks were set with \c mbedtls_ssl_set_timer_cb().
2590
 *
2591
 * \note           With non-blocking I/O, you may also skip this function
2592
 *                 altogether and handle timeouts at the application layer.
2593
 */
2594
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_read_timeout(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, uint32_t timeout);
2595
2596
/**
2597
 * \brief          Check whether a buffer contains a valid and authentic record
2598
 *                 that has not been seen before. (DTLS only).
2599
 *
2600
 *                 This function does not change the user-visible state
2601
 *                 of the SSL context. Its sole purpose is to provide
2602
 *                 an indication of the legitimacy of an incoming record.
2603
 *
2604
 *                 This can be useful e.g. in distributed server environments
2605
 *                 using the DTLS Connection ID feature, in which connections
2606
 *                 might need to be passed between service instances on a change
2607
 *                 of peer address, but where such disruptive operations should
2608
 *                 only happen after the validity of incoming records has been
2609
 *                 confirmed.
2610
 *
2611
 * \param ssl      The SSL context to use.
2612
 * \param buf      The address of the buffer holding the record to be checked.
2613
 *                 This must be a read/write buffer of length \p buflen Bytes.
2614
 * \param buflen   The length of \p buf in Bytes.
2615
 *
2616
 * \note           This routine only checks whether the provided buffer begins
2617
 *                 with a valid and authentic record that has not been seen
2618
 *                 before, but does not check potential data following the
2619
 *                 initial record. In particular, it is possible to pass DTLS
2620
 *                 datagrams containing multiple records, in which case only
2621
 *                 the first record is checked.
2622
 *
2623
 * \note           This function modifies the input buffer \p buf. If you need
2624
 *                 to preserve the original record, you have to maintain a copy.
2625
 *
2626
 * \return         \c 0 if the record is valid and authentic and has not been
2627
 *                 seen before.
2628
 * \return         MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_INVALID_MAC if the check completed
2629
 *                 successfully but the record was found to be not authentic.
2630
 * \return         MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_INVALID_RECORD if the check completed
2631
 *                 successfully but the record was found to be invalid for
2632
 *                 a reason different from authenticity checking.
2633
 * \return         MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_UNEXPECTED_RECORD if the check completed
2634
 *                 successfully but the record was found to be unexpected
2635
 *                 in the state of the SSL context, including replayed records.
2636
 * \return         Another negative error code on different kinds of failure.
2637
 *                 In this case, the SSL context becomes unusable and needs
2638
 *                 to be freed or reset before reuse.
2639
 */
2640
int mbedtls_ssl_check_record(mbedtls_ssl_context const *ssl,
2641
                             unsigned char *buf,
2642
                             size_t buflen);
2643
2644
/**
2645
 * \brief          Set the timer callbacks (Mandatory for DTLS.)
2646
 *
2647
 * \param ssl      SSL context
2648
 * \param p_timer  parameter (context) shared by timer callbacks
2649
 * \param f_set_timer   set timer callback
2650
 * \param f_get_timer   get timer callback. Must return:
2651
 *
2652
 * \note           See the documentation of \c mbedtls_ssl_set_timer_t and
2653
 *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_get_timer_t for the conventions this pair of
2654
 *                 callbacks must follow.
2655
 *
2656
 * \note           On some platforms, timing.c provides
2657
 *                 \c mbedtls_timing_set_delay() and
2658
 *                 \c mbedtls_timing_get_delay() that are suitable for using
2659
 *                 here, except if using an event-driven style.
2660
 *
2661
 * \note           See also the "DTLS tutorial" article in our knowledge base.
2662
 *                 https://mbed-tls.readthedocs.io/en/latest/kb/how-to/dtls-tutorial
2663
 */
2664
void mbedtls_ssl_set_timer_cb(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
2665
                              void *p_timer,
2666
                              mbedtls_ssl_set_timer_t *f_set_timer,
2667
                              mbedtls_ssl_get_timer_t *f_get_timer);
2668
2669
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
2670
/**
2671
 * \brief           Set the certificate selection callback (server-side only).
2672
 *
2673
 *                  If set, the callback is always called for each handshake,
2674
 *                  after `ClientHello` processing has finished.
2675
 *
2676
 * \param conf      The SSL configuration to register the callback with.
2677
 * \param f_cert_cb The callback for selecting server certificate after
2678
 *                  `ClientHello` processing has finished.
2679
 */
2680
static inline void mbedtls_ssl_conf_cert_cb(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
2681
                                            mbedtls_ssl_hs_cb_t f_cert_cb)
2682
0
{
2683
0
    conf->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(f_cert_cb) = f_cert_cb;
2684
0
}
2685
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C */
2686
2687
/**
2688
 * \brief           Callback type: generate and write session ticket
2689
 *
2690
 * \note            This describes what a callback implementation should do.
2691
 *                  This callback should generate an encrypted and
2692
 *                  authenticated ticket for the session and write it to the
2693
 *                  output buffer. Here, ticket means the opaque ticket part
2694
 *                  of the NewSessionTicket structure of RFC 5077.
2695
 *
2696
 * \param p_ticket  Context for the callback
2697
 * \param session   SSL session to be written in the ticket
2698
 * \param start     Start of the output buffer
2699
 * \param end       End of the output buffer
2700
 * \param tlen      On exit, holds the length written
2701
 * \param lifetime  On exit, holds the lifetime of the ticket in seconds
2702
 *
2703
 * \return          0 if successful, or
2704
 *                  a specific MBEDTLS_ERR_XXX code.
2705
 */
2706
typedef int mbedtls_ssl_ticket_write_t(void *p_ticket,
2707
                                       const mbedtls_ssl_session *session,
2708
                                       unsigned char *start,
2709
                                       const unsigned char *end,
2710
                                       size_t *tlen,
2711
                                       uint32_t *lifetime);
2712
2713
/**
2714
 * \brief           Callback type: parse and load session ticket
2715
 *
2716
 * \note            This describes what a callback implementation should do.
2717
 *                  This callback should parse a session ticket as generated
2718
 *                  by the corresponding mbedtls_ssl_ticket_write_t function,
2719
 *                  and, if the ticket is authentic and valid, load the
2720
 *                  session.
2721
 *
2722
 * \note            The implementation is allowed to modify the first len
2723
 *                  bytes of the input buffer, eg to use it as a temporary
2724
 *                  area for the decrypted ticket contents.
2725
 *
2726
 * \param p_ticket  Context for the callback
2727
 * \param session   SSL session to be loaded
2728
 * \param buf       Start of the buffer containing the ticket
2729
 * \param len       Length of the ticket.
2730
 *
2731
 * \return          0 if successful, or
2732
 *                  MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_INVALID_MAC if not authentic, or
2733
 *                  MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_SESSION_TICKET_EXPIRED if expired, or
2734
 *                  any other non-zero code for other failures.
2735
 */
2736
typedef int mbedtls_ssl_ticket_parse_t(void *p_ticket,
2737
                                       mbedtls_ssl_session *session,
2738
                                       unsigned char *buf,
2739
                                       size_t len);
2740
2741
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
2742
/**
2743
 * \brief           Configure SSL session ticket callbacks (server only).
2744
 *                  (Default: none.)
2745
 *
2746
 * \note            On server, session tickets are enabled by providing
2747
 *                  non-NULL callbacks.
2748
 *
2749
 * \note            On client, use \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_session_tickets().
2750
 *
2751
 * \param conf      SSL configuration context
2752
 * \param f_ticket_write    Callback for writing a ticket
2753
 * \param f_ticket_parse    Callback for parsing a ticket
2754
 * \param p_ticket          Context shared by the two callbacks
2755
 */
2756
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_session_tickets_cb(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
2757
                                         mbedtls_ssl_ticket_write_t *f_ticket_write,
2758
                                         mbedtls_ssl_ticket_parse_t *f_ticket_parse,
2759
                                         void *p_ticket);
2760
2761
#if defined(MBEDTLS_HAVE_TIME)
2762
/**
2763
 * \brief Get the creation time of a session ticket.
2764
 *
2765
 * \note See the documentation of \c ticket_creation_time for information about
2766
 *       the intended usage of this function.
2767
 *
2768
 * \param session  SSL session
2769
 * \param ticket_creation_time  On exit, holds the ticket creation time in
2770
 *                              milliseconds.
2771
 *
2772
 * \return         0 on success,
2773
 *                 MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA if an input is not valid.
2774
 */
2775
static inline int mbedtls_ssl_session_get_ticket_creation_time(
2776
    mbedtls_ssl_session *session, mbedtls_ms_time_t *ticket_creation_time)
2777
0
{
2778
0
    if (session == NULL || ticket_creation_time == NULL ||
2779
0
        session->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(endpoint) != MBEDTLS_SSL_IS_SERVER) {
2780
0
        return MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA;
2781
0
    }
2782
0
2783
0
    *ticket_creation_time = session->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(ticket_creation_time);
2784
0
2785
0
    return 0;
2786
0
}
2787
#endif /* MBEDTLS_HAVE_TIME */
2788
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS && MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C */
2789
2790
/**
2791
 * \brief          Get the session-id buffer.
2792
 *
2793
 * \param session  SSL session.
2794
 *
2795
 * \return         The address of the session-id buffer.
2796
 */
2797
static inline unsigned const char (*mbedtls_ssl_session_get_id(const mbedtls_ssl_session *
2798
                                                               session))[32]
2799
0
{
2800
0
    return &session->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(id);
2801
0
}
2802
2803
/**
2804
 * \brief          Get the size of the session-id.
2805
 *
2806
 * \param session  SSL session.
2807
 *
2808
 * \return         size_t size of session-id buffer.
2809
 */
2810
static inline size_t mbedtls_ssl_session_get_id_len(const mbedtls_ssl_session *session)
2811
0
{
2812
0
    return session->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(id_len);
2813
0
}
2814
2815
/**
2816
 * \brief          Get the ciphersuite-id.
2817
 *
2818
 * \param session  SSL session.
2819
 *
2820
 * \return         int represetation for ciphersuite.
2821
 */
2822
static inline int mbedtls_ssl_session_get_ciphersuite_id(const mbedtls_ssl_session *session)
2823
0
{
2824
0
    return session->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(ciphersuite);
2825
0
}
2826
2827
/**
2828
 * \brief   Configure a key export callback.
2829
 *          (Default: none.)
2830
 *
2831
 *          This API can be used for two purposes:
2832
 *          - Debugging: Use this API to e.g. generate an NSSKeylog
2833
 *            file and use it to inspect encrypted traffic in tools
2834
 *            such as Wireshark.
2835
 *          - Application-specific export: Use this API to implement
2836
 *            key exporters, e.g. for EAP-TLS or DTLS-SRTP.
2837
 *
2838
 *
2839
 * \param ssl            The SSL context to which the export
2840
 *                       callback should be attached.
2841
 * \param f_export_keys  The callback for the key export.
2842
 * \param p_export_keys  The opaque context pointer to be passed to the
2843
 *                       callback \p f_export_keys.
2844
 */
2845
void mbedtls_ssl_set_export_keys_cb(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
2846
                                    mbedtls_ssl_export_keys_t *f_export_keys,
2847
                                    void *p_export_keys);
2848
2849
/** \brief Set the user data in an SSL configuration to a pointer.
2850
 *
2851
 * You can retrieve this value later with mbedtls_ssl_conf_get_user_data_p().
2852
 *
2853
 * \note The library stores \c p without accessing it. It is the responsibility
2854
 *       of the caller to ensure that the pointer remains valid.
2855
 *
2856
 * \param conf           The SSL configuration context to modify.
2857
 * \param p              The new value of the user data.
2858
 */
2859
static inline void mbedtls_ssl_conf_set_user_data_p(
2860
    mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
2861
    void *p)
2862
0
{
2863
0
    conf->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(user_data).p = p;
2864
0
}
2865
2866
/** \brief Set the user data in an SSL configuration to an integer.
2867
 *
2868
 * You can retrieve this value later with mbedtls_ssl_conf_get_user_data_n().
2869
 *
2870
 * \param conf           The SSL configuration context to modify.
2871
 * \param n              The new value of the user data.
2872
 */
2873
static inline void mbedtls_ssl_conf_set_user_data_n(
2874
    mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
2875
    uintptr_t n)
2876
0
{
2877
0
    conf->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(user_data).n = n;
2878
0
}
2879
2880
/** \brief Retrieve the user data in an SSL configuration as a pointer.
2881
 *
2882
 * This is the value last set with mbedtls_ssl_conf_set_user_data_p(), or
2883
 * \c NULL if mbedtls_ssl_conf_set_user_data_p() has not previously been
2884
 * called. The value is undefined if mbedtls_ssl_conf_set_user_data_n() has
2885
 * been called without a subsequent call to mbedtls_ssl_conf_set_user_data_p().
2886
 *
2887
 * \param conf           The SSL configuration context to modify.
2888
 * \return               The current value of the user data.
2889
 */
2890
static inline void *mbedtls_ssl_conf_get_user_data_p(
2891
    mbedtls_ssl_config *conf)
2892
0
{
2893
0
    return conf->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(user_data).p;
2894
0
}
2895
2896
/** \brief Retrieve the user data in an SSL configuration as an integer.
2897
 *
2898
 * This is the value last set with mbedtls_ssl_conf_set_user_data_n(), or
2899
 * \c 0 if mbedtls_ssl_conf_set_user_data_n() has not previously been
2900
 * called. The value is undefined if mbedtls_ssl_conf_set_user_data_p() has
2901
 * been called without a subsequent call to mbedtls_ssl_conf_set_user_data_n().
2902
 *
2903
 * \param conf           The SSL configuration context to modify.
2904
 * \return               The current value of the user data.
2905
 */
2906
static inline uintptr_t mbedtls_ssl_conf_get_user_data_n(
2907
    mbedtls_ssl_config *conf)
2908
0
{
2909
0
    return conf->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(user_data).n;
2910
0
}
2911
2912
/** \brief Set the user data in an SSL context to a pointer.
2913
 *
2914
 * You can retrieve this value later with mbedtls_ssl_get_user_data_p().
2915
 *
2916
 * \note The library stores \c p without accessing it. It is the responsibility
2917
 *       of the caller to ensure that the pointer remains valid.
2918
 *
2919
 * \param ssl            The SSL context to modify.
2920
 * \param p              The new value of the user data.
2921
 */
2922
static inline void mbedtls_ssl_set_user_data_p(
2923
    mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
2924
    void *p)
2925
0
{
2926
0
    ssl->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(user_data).p = p;
2927
0
}
2928
2929
/** \brief Set the user data in an SSL context to an integer.
2930
 *
2931
 * You can retrieve this value later with mbedtls_ssl_get_user_data_n().
2932
 *
2933
 * \param ssl            The SSL context to modify.
2934
 * \param n              The new value of the user data.
2935
 */
2936
static inline void mbedtls_ssl_set_user_data_n(
2937
    mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
2938
    uintptr_t n)
2939
0
{
2940
0
    ssl->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(user_data).n = n;
2941
0
}
2942
2943
/** \brief Retrieve the user data in an SSL context as a pointer.
2944
 *
2945
 * This is the value last set with mbedtls_ssl_set_user_data_p(), or
2946
 * \c NULL if mbedtls_ssl_set_user_data_p() has not previously been
2947
 * called. The value is undefined if mbedtls_ssl_set_user_data_n() has
2948
 * been called without a subsequent call to mbedtls_ssl_set_user_data_p().
2949
 *
2950
 * \param ssl            The SSL context to modify.
2951
 * \return               The current value of the user data.
2952
 */
2953
static inline void *mbedtls_ssl_get_user_data_p(
2954
    mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl)
2955
0
{
2956
0
    return ssl->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(user_data).p;
2957
0
}
2958
2959
/** \brief Retrieve the user data in an SSL context as an integer.
2960
 *
2961
 * This is the value last set with mbedtls_ssl_set_user_data_n(), or
2962
 * \c 0 if mbedtls_ssl_set_user_data_n() has not previously been
2963
 * called. The value is undefined if mbedtls_ssl_set_user_data_p() has
2964
 * been called without a subsequent call to mbedtls_ssl_set_user_data_n().
2965
 *
2966
 * \param ssl            The SSL context to modify.
2967
 * \return               The current value of the user data.
2968
 */
2969
static inline uintptr_t mbedtls_ssl_get_user_data_n(
2970
    mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl)
2971
0
{
2972
0
    return ssl->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(user_data).n;
2973
0
}
2974
2975
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_ASYNC_PRIVATE)
2976
/**
2977
 * \brief           Configure asynchronous private key operation callbacks.
2978
 *
2979
 * \param conf              SSL configuration context
2980
 * \param f_async_sign      Callback to start a signature operation. See
2981
 *                          the description of ::mbedtls_ssl_async_sign_t
2982
 *                          for more information. This may be \c NULL if the
2983
 *                          external processor does not support any signature
2984
 *                          operation; in this case the private key object
2985
 *                          associated with the certificate will be used.
2986
 * \param f_async_decrypt   Callback to start a decryption operation. See
2987
 *                          the description of ::mbedtls_ssl_async_decrypt_t
2988
 *                          for more information. This may be \c NULL if the
2989
 *                          external processor does not support any decryption
2990
 *                          operation; in this case the private key object
2991
 *                          associated with the certificate will be used.
2992
 * \param f_async_resume    Callback to resume an asynchronous operation. See
2993
 *                          the description of ::mbedtls_ssl_async_resume_t
2994
 *                          for more information. This may not be \c NULL unless
2995
 *                          \p f_async_sign and \p f_async_decrypt are both
2996
 *                          \c NULL.
2997
 * \param f_async_cancel    Callback to cancel an asynchronous operation. See
2998
 *                          the description of ::mbedtls_ssl_async_cancel_t
2999
 *                          for more information. This may be \c NULL if
3000
 *                          no cleanup is needed.
3001
 * \param config_data       A pointer to configuration data which can be
3002
 *                          retrieved with
3003
 *                          mbedtls_ssl_conf_get_async_config_data(). The
3004
 *                          library stores this value without dereferencing it.
3005
 */
3006
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_async_private_cb(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3007
                                       mbedtls_ssl_async_sign_t *f_async_sign,
3008
                                       mbedtls_ssl_async_decrypt_t *f_async_decrypt,
3009
                                       mbedtls_ssl_async_resume_t *f_async_resume,
3010
                                       mbedtls_ssl_async_cancel_t *f_async_cancel,
3011
                                       void *config_data);
3012
3013
/**
3014
 * \brief           Retrieve the configuration data set by
3015
 *                  mbedtls_ssl_conf_async_private_cb().
3016
 *
3017
 * \param conf      SSL configuration context
3018
 * \return          The configuration data set by
3019
 *                  mbedtls_ssl_conf_async_private_cb().
3020
 */
3021
void *mbedtls_ssl_conf_get_async_config_data(const mbedtls_ssl_config *conf);
3022
3023
/**
3024
 * \brief           Retrieve the asynchronous operation user context.
3025
 *
3026
 * \note            This function may only be called while a handshake
3027
 *                  is in progress.
3028
 *
3029
 * \param ssl       The SSL context to access.
3030
 *
3031
 * \return          The asynchronous operation user context that was last
3032
 *                  set during the current handshake. If
3033
 *                  mbedtls_ssl_set_async_operation_data() has not yet been
3034
 *                  called during the current handshake, this function returns
3035
 *                  \c NULL.
3036
 */
3037
void *mbedtls_ssl_get_async_operation_data(const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
3038
3039
/**
3040
 * \brief           Retrieve the asynchronous operation user context.
3041
 *
3042
 * \note            This function may only be called while a handshake
3043
 *                  is in progress.
3044
 *
3045
 * \param ssl       The SSL context to access.
3046
 * \param ctx       The new value of the asynchronous operation user context.
3047
 *                  Call mbedtls_ssl_get_async_operation_data() later during the
3048
 *                  same handshake to retrieve this value.
3049
 */
3050
void mbedtls_ssl_set_async_operation_data(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
3051
                                          void *ctx);
3052
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_ASYNC_PRIVATE */
3053
3054
/**
3055
 * \brief          Callback type: generate a cookie
3056
 *
3057
 * \param ctx      Context for the callback
3058
 * \param p        Buffer to write to,
3059
 *                 must be updated to point right after the cookie
3060
 * \param end      Pointer to one past the end of the output buffer
3061
 * \param info     Client ID info that was passed to
3062
 *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_set_client_transport_id()
3063
 * \param ilen     Length of info in bytes
3064
 *
3065
 * \return         The callback must return 0 on success,
3066
 *                 or a negative error code.
3067
 */
3068
typedef int mbedtls_ssl_cookie_write_t(void *ctx,
3069
                                       unsigned char **p, unsigned char *end,
3070
                                       const unsigned char *info, size_t ilen);
3071
3072
/**
3073
 * \brief          Callback type: verify a cookie
3074
 *
3075
 * \param ctx      Context for the callback
3076
 * \param cookie   Cookie to verify
3077
 * \param clen     Length of cookie
3078
 * \param info     Client ID info that was passed to
3079
 *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_set_client_transport_id()
3080
 * \param ilen     Length of info in bytes
3081
 *
3082
 * \return         The callback must return 0 if cookie is valid,
3083
 *                 or a negative error code.
3084
 */
3085
typedef int mbedtls_ssl_cookie_check_t(void *ctx,
3086
                                       const unsigned char *cookie, size_t clen,
3087
                                       const unsigned char *info, size_t ilen);
3088
3089
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_HELLO_VERIFY) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
3090
/**
3091
 * \brief           Register callbacks for DTLS cookies
3092
 *                  (Server only. DTLS only.)
3093
 *
3094
 *                  Default: dummy callbacks that fail, in order to force you to
3095
 *                  register working callbacks (and initialize their context).
3096
 *
3097
 *                  To disable HelloVerifyRequest, register NULL callbacks.
3098
 *
3099
 * \warning         Disabling hello verification allows your server to be used
3100
 *                  for amplification in DoS attacks against other hosts.
3101
 *                  Only disable if you known this can't happen in your
3102
 *                  particular environment.
3103
 *
3104
 * \note            See comments on \c mbedtls_ssl_handshake() about handling
3105
 *                  the MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_HELLO_VERIFY_REQUIRED that is expected
3106
 *                  on the first handshake attempt when this is enabled.
3107
 *
3108
 * \note            This is also necessary to handle client reconnection from
3109
 *                  the same port as described in RFC 6347 section 4.2.8 (only
3110
 *                  the variant with cookies is supported currently). See
3111
 *                  comments on \c mbedtls_ssl_read() for details.
3112
 *
3113
 * \param conf              SSL configuration
3114
 * \param f_cookie_write    Cookie write callback
3115
 * \param f_cookie_check    Cookie check callback
3116
 * \param p_cookie          Context for both callbacks
3117
 */
3118
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_dtls_cookies(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3119
                                   mbedtls_ssl_cookie_write_t *f_cookie_write,
3120
                                   mbedtls_ssl_cookie_check_t *f_cookie_check,
3121
                                   void *p_cookie);
3122
3123
/**
3124
 * \brief          Set client's transport-level identification info.
3125
 *                 (Server only. DTLS only.)
3126
 *
3127
 *                 This is usually the IP address (and port), but could be
3128
 *                 anything identify the client depending on the underlying
3129
 *                 network stack. Used for HelloVerifyRequest with DTLS.
3130
 *                 This is *not* used to route the actual packets.
3131
 *
3132
 * \param ssl      SSL context
3133
 * \param info     Transport-level info identifying the client (eg IP + port)
3134
 * \param ilen     Length of info in bytes
3135
 *
3136
 * \note           An internal copy is made, so the info buffer can be reused.
3137
 *
3138
 * \return         0 on success,
3139
 *                 MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA if used on client,
3140
 *                 MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ALLOC_FAILED if out of memory.
3141
 */
3142
int mbedtls_ssl_set_client_transport_id(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
3143
                                        const unsigned char *info,
3144
                                        size_t ilen);
3145
3146
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_HELLO_VERIFY && MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C */
3147
3148
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_ANTI_REPLAY)
3149
/**
3150
 * \brief          Enable or disable anti-replay protection for DTLS.
3151
 *                 (DTLS only, no effect on TLS.)
3152
 *                 Default: enabled.
3153
 *
3154
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
3155
 * \param mode     MBEDTLS_SSL_ANTI_REPLAY_ENABLED or MBEDTLS_SSL_ANTI_REPLAY_DISABLED.
3156
 *
3157
 * \warning        Disabling this is a security risk unless the application
3158
 *                 protocol handles duplicated packets in a safe way. You
3159
 *                 should not disable this without careful consideration.
3160
 *                 However, if your application already detects duplicated
3161
 *                 packets and needs information about them to adjust its
3162
 *                 transmission strategy, then you'll want to disable this.
3163
 */
3164
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_dtls_anti_replay(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, char mode);
3165
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_ANTI_REPLAY */
3166
3167
/**
3168
 * \brief          Set a limit on the number of records with a bad MAC
3169
 *                 before terminating the connection.
3170
 *                 (DTLS only, no effect on TLS.)
3171
 *                 Default: 0 (disabled).
3172
 *
3173
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
3174
 * \param limit    Limit, or 0 to disable.
3175
 *
3176
 * \note           If the limit is N, then the connection is terminated when
3177
 *                 the Nth non-authentic record is seen.
3178
 *
3179
 * \note           Records with an invalid header are not counted, only the
3180
 *                 ones going through the authentication-decryption phase.
3181
 *
3182
 * \note           This is a security trade-off related to the fact that it's
3183
 *                 often relatively easy for an active attacker to inject UDP
3184
 *                 datagrams. On one hand, setting a low limit here makes it
3185
 *                 easier for such an attacker to forcibly terminated a
3186
 *                 connection. On the other hand, a high limit or no limit
3187
 *                 might make us waste resources checking authentication on
3188
 *                 many bogus packets.
3189
 */
3190
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_dtls_badmac_limit(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, unsigned limit);
3191
3192
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_DTLS)
3193
3194
/**
3195
 * \brief          Allow or disallow packing of multiple handshake records
3196
 *                 within a single datagram.
3197
 *
3198
 * \param ssl           The SSL context to configure.
3199
 * \param allow_packing This determines whether datagram packing may
3200
 *                      be used or not. A value of \c 0 means that every
3201
 *                      record will be sent in a separate datagram; a
3202
 *                      value of \c 1 means that, if space permits,
3203
 *                      multiple handshake messages (including CCS) belonging to
3204
 *                      a single flight may be packed within a single datagram.
3205
 *
3206
 * \note           This is enabled by default and should only be disabled
3207
 *                 for test purposes, or if datagram packing causes
3208
 *                 interoperability issues with peers that don't support it.
3209
 *
3210
 * \note           Allowing datagram packing reduces the network load since
3211
 *                 there's less overhead if multiple messages share the same
3212
 *                 datagram. Also, it increases the handshake efficiency
3213
 *                 since messages belonging to a single datagram will not
3214
 *                 be reordered in transit, and so future message buffering
3215
 *                 or flight retransmission (if no buffering is used) as
3216
 *                 means to deal with reordering are needed less frequently.
3217
 *
3218
 * \note           Application records are not affected by this option and
3219
 *                 are currently always sent in separate datagrams.
3220
 *
3221
 */
3222
void mbedtls_ssl_set_datagram_packing(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
3223
                                      unsigned allow_packing);
3224
3225
/**
3226
 * \brief          Set retransmit timeout values for the DTLS handshake.
3227
 *                 (DTLS only, no effect on TLS.)
3228
 *
3229
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
3230
 * \param min      Initial timeout value in milliseconds.
3231
 *                 Default: 1000 (1 second).
3232
 * \param max      Maximum timeout value in milliseconds.
3233
 *                 Default: 60000 (60 seconds).
3234
 *
3235
 * \note           Default values are from RFC 6347 section 4.2.4.1.
3236
 *
3237
 * \note           The 'min' value should typically be slightly above the
3238
 *                 expected round-trip time to your peer, plus whatever time
3239
 *                 it takes for the peer to process the message. For example,
3240
 *                 if your RTT is about 600ms and you peer needs up to 1s to
3241
 *                 do the cryptographic operations in the handshake, then you
3242
 *                 should set 'min' slightly above 1600. Lower values of 'min'
3243
 *                 might cause spurious resends which waste network resources,
3244
 *                 while larger value of 'min' will increase overall latency
3245
 *                 on unreliable network links.
3246
 *
3247
 * \note           The more unreliable your network connection is, the larger
3248
 *                 your max / min ratio needs to be in order to achieve
3249
 *                 reliable handshakes.
3250
 *
3251
 * \note           Messages are retransmitted up to log2(ceil(max/min)) times.
3252
 *                 For example, if min = 1s and max = 5s, the retransmit plan
3253
 *                 goes: send ... 1s -> resend ... 2s -> resend ... 4s ->
3254
 *                 resend ... 5s -> give up and return a timeout error.
3255
 */
3256
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_handshake_timeout(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, uint32_t min, uint32_t max);
3257
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_DTLS */
3258
3259
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
3260
/**
3261
 * \brief          Set the session cache callbacks (server-side only)
3262
 *                 If not set, no session resuming is done (except if session
3263
 *                 tickets are enabled too).
3264
 *
3265
 *                 The session cache has the responsibility to check for stale
3266
 *                 entries based on timeout. See RFC 5246 for recommendations.
3267
 *
3268
 *                 Warning: session.peer_cert is cleared by the SSL/TLS layer on
3269
 *                 connection shutdown, so do not cache the pointer! Either set
3270
 *                 it to NULL or make a full copy of the certificate.
3271
 *
3272
 *                 The get callback is called once during the initial handshake
3273
 *                 to enable session resuming. The get function has the
3274
 *                 following parameters: (void *parameter, mbedtls_ssl_session *session)
3275
 *                 If a valid entry is found, it should fill the master of
3276
 *                 the session object with the cached values and return 0,
3277
 *                 return 1 otherwise. Optionally peer_cert can be set as well
3278
 *                 if it is properly present in cache entry.
3279
 *
3280
 *                 The set callback is called once during the initial handshake
3281
 *                 to enable session resuming after the entire handshake has
3282
 *                 been finished. The set function has the following parameters:
3283
 *                 (void *parameter, const mbedtls_ssl_session *session). The function
3284
 *                 should create a cache entry for future retrieval based on
3285
 *                 the data in the session structure and should keep in mind
3286
 *                 that the mbedtls_ssl_session object presented (and all its referenced
3287
 *                 data) is cleared by the SSL/TLS layer when the connection is
3288
 *                 terminated. It is recommended to add metadata to determine if
3289
 *                 an entry is still valid in the future. Return 0 if
3290
 *                 successfully cached, return 1 otherwise.
3291
 *
3292
 * \param conf           SSL configuration
3293
 * \param p_cache        parameter (context) for both callbacks
3294
 * \param f_get_cache    session get callback
3295
 * \param f_set_cache    session set callback
3296
 */
3297
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_session_cache(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3298
                                    void *p_cache,
3299
                                    mbedtls_ssl_cache_get_t *f_get_cache,
3300
                                    mbedtls_ssl_cache_set_t *f_set_cache);
3301
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C */
3302
3303
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C)
3304
/**
3305
 * \brief          Load a session for session resumption.
3306
 *
3307
 *                 Sessions loaded through this call will be considered
3308
 *                 for session resumption in the next handshake.
3309
 *
3310
 * \note           Even if this call succeeds, it is not guaranteed that
3311
 *                 the next handshake will indeed be shortened through the
3312
 *                 use of session resumption: The server is always free
3313
 *                 to reject any attempt for resumption and fall back to
3314
 *                 a full handshake.
3315
 *
3316
 * \note           This function can handle a variety of mechanisms for session
3317
 *                 resumption: For TLS 1.2, both session ID-based resumption
3318
 *                 and ticket-based resumption will be considered. For TLS 1.3,
3319
 *                 sessions equate to tickets, and loading one session by
3320
 *                 calling this function will lead to its corresponding ticket
3321
 *                 being advertised as resumption PSK by the client. This
3322
 *                 depends on session tickets being enabled (see
3323
 *                 #MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS configuration option) though.
3324
 *                 If session tickets are disabled, a call to this function
3325
 *                 with a TLS 1.3 session, will not have any effect on the next
3326
 *                 handshake for the SSL context \p ssl.
3327
 *
3328
 * \param ssl      The SSL context representing the connection which should
3329
 *                 be attempted to be setup using session resumption. This
3330
 *                 must be initialized via mbedtls_ssl_init() and bound to
3331
 *                 an SSL configuration via mbedtls_ssl_setup(), but
3332
 *                 the handshake must not yet have been started.
3333
 * \param session  The session to be considered for session resumption.
3334
 *                 This must be a session previously exported via
3335
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_get_session(), and potentially serialized and
3336
 *                 deserialized through mbedtls_ssl_session_save() and
3337
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_session_load() in the meantime.
3338
 *
3339
 * \return         \c 0 if successful.
3340
 * \return         \c MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_FEATURE_UNAVAILABLE if the session
3341
 *                 could not be loaded because one session has already been
3342
 *                 loaded. This error is non-fatal, and has no observable
3343
 *                 effect on the SSL context or the session that was attempted
3344
 *                 to be loaded.
3345
 * \return         Another negative error code on other kinds of failure.
3346
 *
3347
 * \sa             mbedtls_ssl_get_session()
3348
 * \sa             mbedtls_ssl_session_load()
3349
 */
3350
int mbedtls_ssl_set_session(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl, const mbedtls_ssl_session *session);
3351
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C */
3352
3353
/**
3354
 * \brief          Load serialized session data into a session structure.
3355
 *                 On client, this can be used for loading saved sessions
3356
 *                 before resuming them with mbedtls_ssl_set_session().
3357
 *                 On server, this can be used for alternative implementations
3358
 *                 of session cache or session tickets.
3359
 *
3360
 * \warning        The serialized data contains highly sensitive material,
3361
 *                 including a resumption key (TLS 1.3) or the master secret
3362
 *                 (TLS 1.2) from which the session's traffic keys are derived.
3363
 *
3364
 *                 The serialized data is not cryptographically protected.
3365
 *                 It is the responsibility of the user of the
3366
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_session_save() and
3367
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_session_load() APIs to ensure both its
3368
 *                 confidentiality and integrity while stored or transported.
3369
 *
3370
 *                 A breach of confidentiality could result in full compromise
3371
 *                 of the associated TLS session, including loss of
3372
 *                 confidentiality and integrity of past and future
3373
 *                 application data protected under that session.
3374
 *
3375
 *                 A breach of integrity may allow modification of the
3376
 *                 serialized data prior to restoration. As it represents
3377
 *                 trusted internal context, tampering could potentially result
3378
 *                 in arbitrary code execution or other severe compromise of
3379
 *                 the hosting process.
3380
 *
3381
 * \warning        If a peer certificate chain is associated with the session,
3382
 *                 the serialized state will only contain the peer's
3383
 *                 end-entity certificate and the result of the chain
3384
 *                 verification (unless verification was disabled), but not
3385
 *                 the rest of the chain.
3386
 *
3387
 * \see            mbedtls_ssl_session_save()
3388
 * \see            mbedtls_ssl_set_session()
3389
 *
3390
 * \param session  The session structure to be populated. It must have been
3391
 *                 initialised with mbedtls_ssl_session_init() but not
3392
 *                 populated yet.
3393
 * \param buf      The buffer holding the serialized session data. It must be a
3394
 *                 readable buffer of at least \p len bytes.
3395
 * \param len      The size of the serialized data in bytes.
3396
 *
3397
 * \return         \c 0 if successful.
3398
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ALLOC_FAILED if memory allocation failed.
3399
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA if input data is invalid.
3400
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_VERSION_MISMATCH if the serialized data
3401
 *                 was generated in a different version or configuration of
3402
 *                 Mbed TLS.
3403
 * \return         Another negative value for other kinds of errors (for
3404
 *                 example, unsupported features in the embedded certificate).
3405
 */
3406
int mbedtls_ssl_session_load(mbedtls_ssl_session *session,
3407
                             const unsigned char *buf,
3408
                             size_t len);
3409
3410
/**
3411
 * \brief          Save session structure as serialized data in a buffer.
3412
 *                 On client, this can be used for saving session data,
3413
 *                 potentially in non-volatile storage, for resuming later.
3414
 *                 On server, this can be used for alternative implementations
3415
 *                 of session cache or session tickets.
3416
 *
3417
 * \see            mbedtls_ssl_session_load()
3418
 *
3419
 * \warning        The serialized data contains highly sensitive material,
3420
 *                 including a resumption key (TLS 1.3) or the master secret
3421
 *                 (TLS 1.2) from which the session's traffic keys are derived.
3422
 *
3423
 *                 The serialized data is not cryptographically protected.
3424
 *                 It is the responsibility of the user of the
3425
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_session_save() and
3426
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_session_load() APIs to ensure both its
3427
 *                 confidentiality and integrity while stored or transported.
3428
 *
3429
 *                 See the mbedtls_ssl_session_load() documentation for
3430
 *                 additional information.
3431
 *
3432
 * \param session  The session structure to be saved.
3433
 * \param buf      The buffer to write the serialized data to. It must be a
3434
 *                 writeable buffer of at least \p buf_len bytes, or may be \c
3435
 *                 NULL if \p buf_len is \c 0.
3436
 * \param buf_len  The number of bytes available for writing in \p buf.
3437
 * \param olen     The size in bytes of the data that has been or would have
3438
 *                 been written. It must point to a valid \c size_t.
3439
 *
3440
 * \note           \p olen is updated to the correct value regardless of
3441
 *                 whether \p buf_len was large enough. This makes it possible
3442
 *                 to determine the necessary size by calling this function
3443
 *                 with \p buf set to \c NULL and \p buf_len to \c 0.
3444
 *
3445
 * \note           For TLS 1.3 sessions, this feature is supported only if the
3446
 *                 MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS configuration option is enabled,
3447
 *                 as in TLS 1.3 session resumption is possible only with
3448
 *                 tickets.
3449
 *
3450
 * \return         \c 0 if successful.
3451
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BUFFER_TOO_SMALL if \p buf is too small.
3452
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_FEATURE_UNAVAILABLE if the
3453
 *                 MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS configuration option is disabled
3454
 *                 and the session is a TLS 1.3 session.
3455
 */
3456
int mbedtls_ssl_session_save(const mbedtls_ssl_session *session,
3457
                             unsigned char *buf,
3458
                             size_t buf_len,
3459
                             size_t *olen);
3460
3461
/**
3462
 * \brief               Set the list of allowed ciphersuites and the preference
3463
 *                      order. First in the list has the highest preference.
3464
 *
3465
 *                      For TLS 1.2, the notion of ciphersuite determines both
3466
 *                      the key exchange mechanism and the suite of symmetric
3467
 *                      algorithms to be used during and after the handshake.
3468
 *
3469
 *                      For TLS 1.3 (in development), the notion of ciphersuite
3470
 *                      only determines the suite of symmetric algorithms to be
3471
 *                      used during and after the handshake, while key exchange
3472
 *                      mechanisms are configured separately.
3473
 *
3474
 *                      In Mbed TLS, ciphersuites for both TLS 1.2 and TLS 1.3
3475
 *                      are configured via this function. For users of TLS 1.3,
3476
 *                      there will be separate API for the configuration of key
3477
 *                      exchange mechanisms.
3478
 *
3479
 *                      The list of ciphersuites passed to this function may
3480
 *                      contain a mixture of TLS 1.2 and TLS 1.3 ciphersuite
3481
 *                      identifiers. This is useful if negotiation of TLS 1.3
3482
 *                      should be attempted, but a fallback to TLS 1.2 would
3483
 *                      be tolerated.
3484
 *
3485
 * \note                By default, the server chooses its preferred
3486
 *                      ciphersuite among those that the client supports. If
3487
 *                      mbedtls_ssl_conf_preference_order() is called to prefer
3488
 *                      the client's preferences, the server instead chooses
3489
 *                      the client's preferred ciphersuite among those that
3490
 *                      the server supports.
3491
 *
3492
 * \warning             The ciphersuites array \p ciphersuites is not copied.
3493
 *                      It must remain valid for the lifetime of the SSL
3494
 *                      configuration \p conf.
3495
 *
3496
 * \param conf          The SSL configuration to modify.
3497
 * \param ciphersuites  A 0-terminated list of IANA identifiers of supported
3498
 *                      ciphersuites, accessible through \c MBEDTLS_TLS_XXX
3499
 *                      and \c MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_XXX macros defined in
3500
 *                      ssl_ciphersuites.h.
3501
 */
3502
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_ciphersuites(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3503
                                   const int *ciphersuites);
3504
3505
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3)
3506
/**
3507
 * \brief Set the supported key exchange modes for TLS 1.3 connections.
3508
 *
3509
 *        In contrast to TLS 1.2, the ciphersuite concept in TLS 1.3 does not
3510
 *        include the choice of key exchange mechanism. It is therefore not
3511
 *        covered by the API mbedtls_ssl_conf_ciphersuites(). See the
3512
 *        documentation of mbedtls_ssl_conf_ciphersuites() for more
3513
 *        information on the ciphersuite concept in TLS 1.2 and TLS 1.3.
3514
 *
3515
 *        The present function is specific to TLS 1.3 and allows users to
3516
 *        configure the set of supported key exchange mechanisms in TLS 1.3.
3517
 *
3518
 * \param conf       The SSL configuration the change should apply to.
3519
 * \param kex_modes  A bitwise combination of one or more of the following:
3520
 *                   - MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_PSK
3521
 *                     This flag enables pure-PSK key exchanges.
3522
 *                   - MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_PSK_EPHEMERAL
3523
 *                     This flag enables combined PSK-ephemeral key exchanges.
3524
 *                   - MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_EPHEMERAL
3525
 *                     This flag enables pure-ephemeral key exchanges.
3526
 *                   For convenience, the following pre-defined macros are
3527
 *                   available for combinations of the above:
3528
 *                   - MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_ALL
3529
 *                     Includes all of pure-PSK, PSK-ephemeral and pure-ephemeral.
3530
 *                   - MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_PSK_ALL
3531
 *                     Includes both pure-PSK and combined PSK-ephemeral
3532
 *                     key exchanges, but excludes pure-ephemeral key exchanges.
3533
 *                   - MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_KEY_EXCHANGE_MODE_EPHEMERAL_ALL
3534
 *                     Includes both pure-ephemeral and combined PSK-ephemeral
3535
 *                     key exchanges.
3536
 *
3537
 * \note  If a PSK-based key exchange mode shall be supported, applications
3538
 *        must also use the APIs mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk() or
3539
 *        mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk_cb() or mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk_opaque()
3540
 *        to configure the PSKs to be used.
3541
 *
3542
 * \note  If a pure-ephemeral key exchange mode shall be supported,
3543
 *        server-side applications must also provide a certificate via
3544
 *        mbedtls_ssl_conf_own_cert().
3545
 *
3546
 */
3547
3548
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_tls13_key_exchange_modes(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3549
                                               const int kex_modes);
3550
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3 */
3551
3552
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID)
3553
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_UNEXPECTED_CID_IGNORE 0
3554
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_UNEXPECTED_CID_FAIL   1
3555
/**
3556
 * \brief               Specify the length of Connection IDs for incoming
3557
 *                      encrypted DTLS records, as well as the behaviour
3558
 *                      on unexpected CIDs.
3559
 *
3560
 *                      By default, the CID length is set to \c 0,
3561
 *                      and unexpected CIDs are silently ignored.
3562
 *
3563
 * \param conf          The SSL configuration to modify.
3564
 * \param len           The length in Bytes of the CID fields in encrypted
3565
 *                      DTLS records using the CID mechanism. This must
3566
 *                      not be larger than #MBEDTLS_SSL_CID_OUT_LEN_MAX.
3567
 * \param ignore_other_cids This determines the stack's behaviour when
3568
 *                          receiving a record with an unexpected CID.
3569
 *                          Possible values are:
3570
 *                          - #MBEDTLS_SSL_UNEXPECTED_CID_IGNORE
3571
 *                            In this case, the record is silently ignored.
3572
 *                          - #MBEDTLS_SSL_UNEXPECTED_CID_FAIL
3573
 *                            In this case, the stack fails with the specific
3574
 *                            error code #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_UNEXPECTED_CID.
3575
 *
3576
 * \note                The CID specification allows implementations to either
3577
 *                      use a common length for all incoming connection IDs or
3578
 *                      allow variable-length incoming IDs. Mbed TLS currently
3579
 *                      requires a common length for all connections sharing the
3580
 *                      same SSL configuration; this allows simpler parsing of
3581
 *                      record headers.
3582
 *
3583
 * \return              \c 0 on success.
3584
 * \return              #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA if \p len
3585
 *                      is too large.
3586
 */
3587
int mbedtls_ssl_conf_cid(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, size_t len,
3588
                         int ignore_other_cids);
3589
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_CONNECTION_ID */
3590
3591
#if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C)
3592
/**
3593
 * \brief          Set the X.509 security profile used for verification
3594
 *
3595
 * \note           The restrictions are enforced for all certificates in the
3596
 *                 chain. However, signatures in the handshake are not covered
3597
 *                 by this setting but by \b mbedtls_ssl_conf_sig_hashes().
3598
 *
3599
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
3600
 * \param profile  Profile to use
3601
 */
3602
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_cert_profile(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3603
                                   const mbedtls_x509_crt_profile *profile);
3604
3605
/**
3606
 * \brief          Set the data required to verify peer certificate
3607
 *
3608
 * \note           See \c mbedtls_x509_crt_verify() for notes regarding the
3609
 *                 parameters ca_chain (maps to trust_ca for that function)
3610
 *                 and ca_crl.
3611
 *
3612
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
3613
 * \param ca_chain trusted CA chain (meaning all fully trusted top-level CAs)
3614
 * \param ca_crl   trusted CA CRLs
3615
 */
3616
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_ca_chain(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3617
                               mbedtls_x509_crt *ca_chain,
3618
                               mbedtls_x509_crl *ca_crl);
3619
3620
#if defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_CERT_REQ_ALLOWED_ENABLED)
3621
/**
3622
 * \brief          Set DN hints sent to client in CertificateRequest message
3623
 *
3624
 * \note           If not set, subject distinguished names (DNs) are taken
3625
 *                 from \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_ca_chain()
3626
 *                 or \c mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_ca_chain())
3627
 *
3628
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
3629
 * \param crt      crt chain whose subject DNs are issuer DNs of client certs
3630
 *                 from which the client should select client peer certificate.
3631
 */
3632
static inline
3633
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_dn_hints(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3634
                               const mbedtls_x509_crt *crt)
3635
0
{
3636
0
    conf->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(dn_hints) = crt;
3637
0
}
3638
#endif /* MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_CERT_REQ_ALLOWED_ENABLED */
3639
3640
#if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_TRUSTED_CERTIFICATE_CALLBACK)
3641
/**
3642
 * \brief          Set the trusted certificate callback.
3643
 *
3644
 *                 This API allows to register the set of trusted certificates
3645
 *                 through a callback, instead of a linked list as configured
3646
 *                 by mbedtls_ssl_conf_ca_chain().
3647
 *
3648
 *                 This is useful for example in contexts where a large number
3649
 *                 of CAs are used, and the inefficiency of maintaining them
3650
 *                 in a linked list cannot be tolerated. It is also useful when
3651
 *                 the set of trusted CAs needs to be modified frequently.
3652
 *
3653
 *                 See the documentation of `mbedtls_x509_crt_ca_cb_t` for
3654
 *                 more information.
3655
 *
3656
 * \param conf     The SSL configuration to register the callback with.
3657
 * \param f_ca_cb  The trusted certificate callback to use when verifying
3658
 *                 certificate chains.
3659
 * \param p_ca_cb  The context to be passed to \p f_ca_cb (for example,
3660
 *                 a reference to a trusted CA database).
3661
 *
3662
 * \note           This API is incompatible with mbedtls_ssl_conf_ca_chain():
3663
 *                 Any call to this function overwrites the values set through
3664
 *                 earlier calls to mbedtls_ssl_conf_ca_chain() or
3665
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_conf_ca_cb().
3666
 *
3667
 * \note           This API is incompatible with CA indication in
3668
 *                 CertificateRequest messages: A server-side SSL context which
3669
 *                 is bound to an SSL configuration that uses a CA callback
3670
 *                 configured via mbedtls_ssl_conf_ca_cb(), and which requires
3671
 *                 client authentication, will send an empty CA list in the
3672
 *                 corresponding CertificateRequest message.
3673
 *
3674
 * \note           This API is incompatible with mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_ca_chain():
3675
 *                 If an SSL context is bound to an SSL configuration which uses
3676
 *                 CA callbacks configured via mbedtls_ssl_conf_ca_cb(), then
3677
 *                 calls to mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_ca_chain() have no effect.
3678
 *
3679
 * \note           The use of this API disables the use of restartable ECC
3680
 *                 during X.509 CRT signature verification (but doesn't affect
3681
 *                 other uses).
3682
 *
3683
 * \warning        This API is incompatible with the use of CRLs. Any call to
3684
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_conf_ca_cb() unsets CRLs configured through
3685
 *                 earlier calls to mbedtls_ssl_conf_ca_chain().
3686
 *
3687
 * \warning        In multi-threaded environments, the callback \p f_ca_cb
3688
 *                 must be thread-safe, and it is the user's responsibility
3689
 *                 to guarantee this (for example through a mutex
3690
 *                 contained in the callback context pointed to by \p p_ca_cb).
3691
 */
3692
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_ca_cb(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3693
                            mbedtls_x509_crt_ca_cb_t f_ca_cb,
3694
                            void *p_ca_cb);
3695
#endif /* MBEDTLS_X509_TRUSTED_CERTIFICATE_CALLBACK */
3696
3697
/**
3698
 * \brief          Set own certificate chain and private key
3699
 *
3700
 * \note           own_cert should contain in order from the bottom up your
3701
 *                 certificate chain. The top certificate (self-signed)
3702
 *                 can be omitted.
3703
 *
3704
 * \note           On server, this function can be called multiple times to
3705
 *                 provision more than one cert/key pair (eg one ECDSA, one
3706
 *                 RSA with SHA-256, one RSA with SHA-1). An adequate
3707
 *                 certificate will be selected according to the client's
3708
 *                 advertised capabilities. In case multiple certificates are
3709
 *                 adequate, preference is given to the one set by the first
3710
 *                 call to this function, then second, etc.
3711
 *
3712
 * \note           On client, only the first call has any effect. That is,
3713
 *                 only one client certificate can be provisioned. The
3714
 *                 server's preferences in its CertificateRequest message will
3715
 *                 be ignored and our only cert will be sent regardless of
3716
 *                 whether it matches those preferences - the server can then
3717
 *                 decide what it wants to do with it.
3718
 *
3719
 * \note           The provided \p pk_key needs to match the public key in the
3720
 *                 first certificate in \p own_cert, or all handshakes using
3721
 *                 that certificate will fail. It is your responsibility
3722
 *                 to ensure that; this function will not perform any check.
3723
 *                 You may use mbedtls_pk_check_pair() in order to perform
3724
 *                 this check yourself, but be aware that this function can
3725
 *                 be computationally expensive on some key types.
3726
 *
3727
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
3728
 * \param own_cert own public certificate chain
3729
 * \param pk_key   own private key
3730
 *
3731
 * \return         0 on success or MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ALLOC_FAILED
3732
 */
3733
int mbedtls_ssl_conf_own_cert(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3734
                              mbedtls_x509_crt *own_cert,
3735
                              mbedtls_pk_context *pk_key);
3736
#endif /* MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C */
3737
3738
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_HANDSHAKE_WITH_PSK_ENABLED)
3739
/**
3740
 * \brief          Configure pre-shared keys (PSKs) and their
3741
 *                 identities to be used in PSK-based ciphersuites.
3742
 *
3743
 *                 Only one PSK can be registered, through either
3744
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk() or mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk_opaque().
3745
 *                 If you attempt to register more than one PSK, this function
3746
 *                 fails, though this may change in future versions, which
3747
 *                 may add support for multiple PSKs.
3748
 *
3749
 * \note           This is mainly useful for clients. Servers will usually
3750
 *                 want to use \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk_cb() instead.
3751
 *
3752
 * \note           A PSK set by \c mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_psk() in the PSK callback
3753
 *                 takes precedence over a PSK configured by this function.
3754
 *
3755
 * \param conf     The SSL configuration to register the PSK with.
3756
 * \param psk      The pointer to the pre-shared key to use.
3757
 * \param psk_len  The length of the pre-shared key in bytes.
3758
 * \param psk_identity      The pointer to the pre-shared key identity.
3759
 * \param psk_identity_len  The length of the pre-shared key identity
3760
 *                          in bytes.
3761
 *
3762
 * \note           The PSK and its identity are copied internally and
3763
 *                 hence need not be preserved by the caller for the lifetime
3764
 *                 of the SSL configuration.
3765
 *
3766
 * \return         \c 0 if successful.
3767
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_FEATURE_UNAVAILABLE if no more PSKs
3768
 *                 can be configured. In this case, the old PSK(s) remain intact.
3769
 * \return         Another negative error code on other kinds of failure.
3770
 */
3771
int mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3772
                         const unsigned char *psk, size_t psk_len,
3773
                         const unsigned char *psk_identity, size_t psk_identity_len);
3774
3775
#if defined(MBEDTLS_USE_PSA_CRYPTO)
3776
/**
3777
 * \brief          Configure one or more opaque pre-shared keys (PSKs) and
3778
 *                 their identities to be used in PSK-based ciphersuites.
3779
 *
3780
 *                 Only one PSK can be registered, through either
3781
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk() or mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk_opaque().
3782
 *                 If you attempt to register more than one PSK, this function
3783
 *                 fails, though this may change in future versions, which
3784
 *                 may add support for multiple PSKs.
3785
 *
3786
 * \note           This is mainly useful for clients. Servers will usually
3787
 *                 want to use \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk_cb() instead.
3788
 *
3789
 * \note           An opaque PSK set by \c mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_psk_opaque() in
3790
 *                 the PSK callback takes precedence over an opaque PSK
3791
 *                 configured by this function.
3792
 *
3793
 * \param conf     The SSL configuration to register the PSK with.
3794
 * \param psk      The identifier of the key slot holding the PSK.
3795
 *                 Until \p conf is destroyed or this function is successfully
3796
 *                 called again, the key slot \p psk must be populated with a
3797
 *                 key of type PSA_ALG_CATEGORY_KEY_DERIVATION whose policy
3798
 *                 allows its use for the key derivation algorithm applied
3799
 *                 in the handshake.
3800
 * \param psk_identity      The pointer to the pre-shared key identity.
3801
 * \param psk_identity_len  The length of the pre-shared key identity
3802
 *                          in bytes.
3803
 *
3804
 * \note           The PSK identity hint is copied internally and hence need
3805
 *                 not be preserved by the caller for the lifetime of the
3806
 *                 SSL configuration.
3807
 *
3808
 * \return         \c 0 if successful.
3809
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_FEATURE_UNAVAILABLE if no more PSKs
3810
 *                 can be configured. In this case, the old PSK(s) remain intact.
3811
 * \return         Another negative error code on other kinds of failure.
3812
 */
3813
int mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk_opaque(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3814
                                mbedtls_svc_key_id_t psk,
3815
                                const unsigned char *psk_identity,
3816
                                size_t psk_identity_len);
3817
#endif /* MBEDTLS_USE_PSA_CRYPTO */
3818
3819
/**
3820
 * \brief          Set the pre-shared Key (PSK) for the current handshake.
3821
 *
3822
 * \note           This should only be called inside the PSK callback,
3823
 *                 i.e. the function passed to \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk_cb().
3824
 *
3825
 * \note           A PSK set by this function takes precedence over a PSK
3826
 *                 configured by \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk().
3827
 *
3828
 * \param ssl      The SSL context to configure a PSK for.
3829
 * \param psk      The pointer to the pre-shared key.
3830
 * \param psk_len  The length of the pre-shared key in bytes.
3831
 *
3832
 * \return         \c 0 if successful.
3833
 * \return         An \c MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_XXX error code on failure.
3834
 */
3835
int mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_psk(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
3836
                           const unsigned char *psk, size_t psk_len);
3837
3838
#if defined(MBEDTLS_USE_PSA_CRYPTO)
3839
/**
3840
 * \brief          Set an opaque pre-shared Key (PSK) for the current handshake.
3841
 *
3842
 * \note           This should only be called inside the PSK callback,
3843
 *                 i.e. the function passed to \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk_cb().
3844
 *
3845
 * \note           An opaque PSK set by this function takes precedence over an
3846
 *                 opaque PSK configured by \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk_opaque().
3847
 *
3848
 * \param ssl      The SSL context to configure a PSK for.
3849
 * \param psk      The identifier of the key slot holding the PSK.
3850
 *                 For the duration of the current handshake, the key slot
3851
 *                 must be populated with a key of type
3852
 *                 PSA_ALG_CATEGORY_KEY_DERIVATION whose policy allows its
3853
 *                 use for the key derivation algorithm
3854
 *                 applied in the handshake.
3855
 *
3856
 * \return         \c 0 if successful.
3857
 * \return         An \c MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_XXX error code on failure.
3858
 */
3859
int mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_psk_opaque(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
3860
                                  mbedtls_svc_key_id_t psk);
3861
#endif /* MBEDTLS_USE_PSA_CRYPTO */
3862
3863
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
3864
/**
3865
 * \brief          Set the PSK callback (server-side only).
3866
 *
3867
 *                 If set, the PSK callback is called for each
3868
 *                 handshake where a PSK-based ciphersuite was negotiated.
3869
 *                 The caller provides the identity received and wants to
3870
 *                 receive the actual PSK data and length.
3871
 *
3872
 *                 The callback has the following parameters:
3873
 *                 - \c void*: The opaque pointer \p p_psk.
3874
 *                 - \c mbedtls_ssl_context*: The SSL context to which
3875
 *                                            the operation applies.
3876
 *                 - \c const unsigned char*: The PSK identity
3877
 *                                            selected by the client.
3878
 *                 - \c size_t: The length of the PSK identity
3879
 *                              selected by the client.
3880
 *
3881
 *                 If a valid PSK identity is found, the callback should use
3882
 *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_psk() or
3883
 *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_psk_opaque()
3884
 *                 on the SSL context to set the correct PSK and return \c 0.
3885
 *                 Any other return value will result in a denied PSK identity.
3886
 *
3887
 * \note           A dynamic PSK (i.e. set by the PSK callback) takes
3888
 *                 precedence over a static PSK (i.e. set by
3889
 *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk() or
3890
 *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk_opaque()).
3891
 *                 This means that if you set a PSK callback using this
3892
 *                 function, you don't need to set a PSK using
3893
 *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk() or
3894
 *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk_opaque()).
3895
 *
3896
 * \param conf     The SSL configuration to register the callback with.
3897
 * \param f_psk    The callback for selecting and setting the PSK based
3898
 *                 in the PSK identity chosen by the client.
3899
 * \param p_psk    A pointer to an opaque structure to be passed to
3900
 *                 the callback, for example a PSK store.
3901
 */
3902
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_psk_cb(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3903
                             int (*f_psk)(void *, mbedtls_ssl_context *, const unsigned char *,
3904
                                          size_t),
3905
                             void *p_psk);
3906
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C */
3907
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_HANDSHAKE_WITH_PSK_ENABLED */
3908
3909
#if defined(MBEDTLS_DHM_C) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
3910
/**
3911
 * \brief          Set the Diffie-Hellman public P and G values
3912
 *                 from big-endian binary presentations.
3913
 *                 (Default values: MBEDTLS_DHM_RFC3526_MODP_2048_[PG]_BIN)
3914
 *
3915
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
3916
 * \param dhm_P    Diffie-Hellman-Merkle modulus in big-endian binary form
3917
 * \param P_len    Length of DHM modulus
3918
 * \param dhm_G    Diffie-Hellman-Merkle generator in big-endian binary form
3919
 * \param G_len    Length of DHM generator
3920
 *
3921
 * \return         0 if successful
3922
 */
3923
int mbedtls_ssl_conf_dh_param_bin(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3924
                                  const unsigned char *dhm_P, size_t P_len,
3925
                                  const unsigned char *dhm_G,  size_t G_len);
3926
3927
/**
3928
 * \brief          Set the Diffie-Hellman public P and G values,
3929
 *                 read from existing context (server-side only)
3930
 *
3931
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
3932
 * \param dhm_ctx  Diffie-Hellman-Merkle context
3933
 *
3934
 * \return         0 if successful
3935
 */
3936
int mbedtls_ssl_conf_dh_param_ctx(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, mbedtls_dhm_context *dhm_ctx);
3937
#endif /* MBEDTLS_DHM_C && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C) */
3938
3939
#if defined(MBEDTLS_DHM_C) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C)
3940
/**
3941
 * \brief          Set the minimum length for Diffie-Hellman parameters.
3942
 *                 (Client-side only.)
3943
 *                 (Default: 1024 bits.)
3944
 *
3945
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
3946
 * \param bitlen   Minimum bit length of the DHM prime
3947
 */
3948
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_dhm_min_bitlen(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3949
                                     unsigned int bitlen);
3950
#endif /* MBEDTLS_DHM_C && MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C */
3951
3952
#if defined(MBEDTLS_ECP_C)
3953
#if !defined(MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED_REMOVED)
3954
/**
3955
 * \brief          Set the allowed curves in order of preference.
3956
 *
3957
 *                 On server: this only affects selection of the ECDHE curve;
3958
 *                 the curves used for ECDH and ECDSA are determined by the
3959
 *                 list of available certificates instead.
3960
 *
3961
 *                 On client: this affects the list of curves offered for any
3962
 *                 use. The server can override our preference order.
3963
 *
3964
 *                 Both sides: limits the set of curves accepted for use in
3965
 *                 ECDHE and in the peer's end-entity certificate.
3966
 *
3967
 * \deprecated     Superseded by mbedtls_ssl_conf_groups().
3968
 *
3969
 * \note           This has no influence on which curves are allowed inside the
3970
 *                 certificate chains, see \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_cert_profile()
3971
 *                 for that. For the end-entity certificate however, the key
3972
 *                 will be accepted only if it is allowed both by this list
3973
 *                 and by the cert profile.
3974
 *
3975
 * \note           This list should be ordered by decreasing preference
3976
 *                 (preferred curve first).
3977
 *
3978
 * \note           The default list is the same set of curves that
3979
 *                 #mbedtls_x509_crt_profile_default allows, plus
3980
 *                 ECDHE-only curves selected according to the same criteria.
3981
 *                 The order favors curves with the lowest resource usage.
3982
 *
3983
 * \note           New minor versions of Mbed TLS may extend this list,
3984
 *                 for example if new curves are added to the library.
3985
 *                 New minor versions of Mbed TLS will not remove items
3986
 *                 from this list unless serious security concerns require it.
3987
 *                 New minor versions of Mbed TLS may change the order in
3988
 *                 keeping with the general principle of favoring the lowest
3989
 *                 resource usage.
3990
 *
3991
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
3992
 * \param curves   Ordered list of allowed curves,
3993
 *                 terminated by MBEDTLS_ECP_DP_NONE.
3994
 */
3995
void MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED mbedtls_ssl_conf_curves(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
3996
                                                const mbedtls_ecp_group_id *curves);
3997
#endif /* MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED_REMOVED */
3998
#endif /* MBEDTLS_ECP_C */
3999
4000
/**
4001
 * \brief          Set the allowed groups in order of preference.
4002
 *
4003
 *                 On server: This only affects the choice of key agreement mechanism
4004
 *
4005
 *                 On client: this affects the list of groups offered for any
4006
 *                 use. The server can override our preference order.
4007
 *
4008
 *                 Both sides: limits the set of groups accepted for use in
4009
 *                 key sharing.
4010
 *
4011
 * \note           This function replaces the deprecated mbedtls_ssl_conf_curves(),
4012
 *                 which only allows ECP curves to be configured.
4013
 *
4014
 * \note           The most recent invocation of either mbedtls_ssl_conf_curves()
4015
 *                 or mbedtls_ssl_conf_groups() nullifies all previous invocations
4016
 *                 of both.
4017
 *
4018
 * \note           This list should be ordered by decreasing preference
4019
 *                 (preferred group first).
4020
 *
4021
 * \note           When this function is not called, a default list is used,
4022
 *                 consisting of all supported curves at 255 bits and above,
4023
 *                 and all supported finite fields at 2048 bits and above.
4024
 *                 The order favors groups with the lowest resource usage.
4025
 *
4026
 * \note           New minor versions of Mbed TLS will not remove items
4027
 *                 from the default list unless serious security concerns require it.
4028
 *                 New minor versions of Mbed TLS may change the order in
4029
 *                 keeping with the general principle of favoring the lowest
4030
 *                 resource usage.
4031
 *
4032
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
4033
 * \param groups   List of allowed groups ordered by preference, terminated by 0.
4034
 *                 Must contain valid IANA NamedGroup IDs (provided via either an integer
4035
 *                 or using MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_NAMED_GROUP_XXX macros).
4036
 */
4037
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_groups(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
4038
                             const uint16_t *groups);
4039
4040
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_HANDSHAKE_WITH_CERT_ENABLED)
4041
#if !defined(MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED_REMOVED) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_2)
4042
/**
4043
 * \brief          Set the allowed hashes for signatures during the handshake.
4044
 *
4045
 * \note           This only affects which hashes are offered and can be used
4046
 *                 for signatures during the handshake. Hashes for message
4047
 *                 authentication and the TLS PRF are controlled by the
4048
 *                 ciphersuite, see \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_ciphersuites(). Hashes
4049
 *                 used for certificate signature are controlled by the
4050
 *                 verification profile, see \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_cert_profile().
4051
 *
4052
 * \deprecated     Superseded by mbedtls_ssl_conf_sig_algs().
4053
 *
4054
 * \note           This list should be ordered by decreasing preference
4055
 *                 (preferred hash first).
4056
 *
4057
 * \note           By default, all supported hashes whose length is at least
4058
 *                 256 bits are allowed. This is the same set as the default
4059
 *                 for certificate verification
4060
 *                 (#mbedtls_x509_crt_profile_default).
4061
 *                 The preference order is currently unspecified and may
4062
 *                 change in future versions.
4063
 *
4064
 * \note           New minor versions of Mbed TLS may extend this list,
4065
 *                 for example if new curves are added to the library.
4066
 *                 New minor versions of Mbed TLS will not remove items
4067
 *                 from this list unless serious security concerns require it.
4068
 *
4069
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
4070
 * \param hashes   Ordered list of allowed signature hashes,
4071
 *                 terminated by \c MBEDTLS_MD_NONE.
4072
 */
4073
void MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED mbedtls_ssl_conf_sig_hashes(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
4074
                                                    const int *hashes);
4075
#endif /* !MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED_REMOVED && MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_2 */
4076
4077
/**
4078
 * \brief          Configure allowed signature algorithms for use in TLS
4079
 *
4080
 * \param conf     The SSL configuration to use.
4081
 * \param sig_algs List of allowed IANA values for TLS 1.3 signature algorithms,
4082
 *                 terminated by #MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_NONE. The list must remain
4083
 *                 available throughout the lifetime of the conf object.
4084
 *                 - For TLS 1.3, values of \c MBEDTLS_TLS1_3_SIG_XXXX should be
4085
 *                   used.
4086
 *                 - For TLS 1.2, values should be given as
4087
 *                   "(HashAlgorithm << 8) | SignatureAlgorithm".
4088
 */
4089
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_sig_algs(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
4090
                               const uint16_t *sig_algs);
4091
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_HANDSHAKE_WITH_CERT_ENABLED */
4092
4093
#if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C)
4094
/**
4095
 * \brief          Set or reset the hostname to check against the received
4096
 *                 peer certificate. On a client, this also sets the
4097
 *                 ServerName TLS extension, if that extension is enabled.
4098
 *                 On a TLS 1.3 client, this also sets the server name in
4099
 *                 the session resumption ticket, if that feature is enabled.
4100
 *
4101
 * \param ssl      SSL context
4102
 * \param hostname The server hostname. This may be \c NULL to clear
4103
 *                 the hostname.
4104
 *
4105
 * \note           Maximum hostname length #MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_HOST_NAME_LEN.
4106
 *
4107
 * \note           If the hostname is \c NULL on a client, then the server
4108
 *                 is not authenticated: it only needs to have a valid
4109
 *                 certificate, not a certificate matching its name.
4110
 *                 Therefore you should always call this function on a client,
4111
 *                 unless the connection is set up to only allow
4112
 *                 pre-shared keys, or in scenarios where server
4113
 *                 impersonation is not a concern. See the documentation of
4114
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CERTIFICATE_VERIFICATION_WITHOUT_HOSTNAME
4115
 *                 for more details.
4116
 *
4117
 * \return         0 if successful, #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ALLOC_FAILED on
4118
 *                 allocation failure, #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA on
4119
 *                 too long input hostname.
4120
 *
4121
 *                 Hostname set to the one provided on success (cleared
4122
 *                 when NULL). On allocation failure hostname is cleared.
4123
 *                 On too long input failure, old hostname is unchanged.
4124
 */
4125
int mbedtls_ssl_set_hostname(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl, const char *hostname);
4126
4127
/**
4128
 * \brief          Get the hostname that checked against the received
4129
 *                 server certificate. It is used to set the ServerName
4130
 *                 TLS extension, too, if that extension is enabled.
4131
 *                 (client-side only)
4132
 *
4133
 * \param ssl      SSL context
4134
 *
4135
 * \return         const pointer to the hostname value
4136
 */
4137
static inline const char *mbedtls_ssl_get_hostname(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl)
4138
0
{
4139
0
    return ssl->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(hostname);
4140
0
}
4141
#endif /* MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C */
4142
4143
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SERVER_NAME_INDICATION)
4144
/**
4145
 * \brief          Retrieve SNI extension value for the current handshake.
4146
 *                 Available in \c f_cert_cb of \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_cert_cb(),
4147
 *                 this is the same value passed to \c f_sni callback of
4148
 *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_sni() and may be used instead of
4149
 *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_sni().
4150
 *
4151
 * \param ssl      SSL context
4152
 * \param name_len pointer into which to store length of returned value.
4153
 *                 0 if SNI extension is not present or not yet processed.
4154
 *
4155
 * \return         const pointer to SNI extension value.
4156
 *                 - value is valid only when called in \c f_cert_cb
4157
 *                   registered with \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_cert_cb().
4158
 *                 - value is NULL if SNI extension is not present.
4159
 *                 - value is not '\0'-terminated. Use \c name_len for len.
4160
 *                 - value must not be freed.
4161
 */
4162
const unsigned char *mbedtls_ssl_get_hs_sni(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
4163
                                            size_t *name_len);
4164
4165
/**
4166
 * \brief          Set own certificate and key for the current handshake
4167
 *
4168
 * \note           Same as \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_own_cert() but for use within
4169
 *                 the SNI callback or the certificate selection callback.
4170
 *
4171
 * \note           Passing null \c own_cert clears the certificate list for
4172
 *                 the current handshake.
4173
 *
4174
 * \param ssl      SSL context
4175
 * \param own_cert own public certificate chain
4176
 * \param pk_key   own private key
4177
 *
4178
 * \return         0 on success or MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ALLOC_FAILED
4179
 */
4180
int mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_own_cert(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
4181
                                mbedtls_x509_crt *own_cert,
4182
                                mbedtls_pk_context *pk_key);
4183
4184
/**
4185
 * \brief          Set the data required to verify peer certificate for the
4186
 *                 current handshake
4187
 *
4188
 * \note           Same as \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_ca_chain() but for use within
4189
 *                 the SNI callback or the certificate selection callback.
4190
 *
4191
 * \param ssl      SSL context
4192
 * \param ca_chain trusted CA chain (meaning all fully trusted top-level CAs)
4193
 * \param ca_crl   trusted CA CRLs
4194
 */
4195
void mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_ca_chain(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
4196
                                 mbedtls_x509_crt *ca_chain,
4197
                                 mbedtls_x509_crl *ca_crl);
4198
4199
#if defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_CERT_REQ_ALLOWED_ENABLED)
4200
/**
4201
 * \brief          Set DN hints sent to client in CertificateRequest message
4202
 *
4203
 * \note           Same as \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_dn_hints() but for use within
4204
 *                 the SNI callback or the certificate selection callback.
4205
 *
4206
 * \param ssl      SSL context
4207
 * \param crt      crt chain whose subject DNs are issuer DNs of client certs
4208
 *                 from which the client should select client peer certificate.
4209
 */
4210
void mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_dn_hints(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
4211
                                 const mbedtls_x509_crt *crt);
4212
#endif /* MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_CERT_REQ_ALLOWED_ENABLED */
4213
4214
/**
4215
 * \brief          Set authmode for the current handshake.
4216
 *
4217
 * \note           Same as \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_authmode() but for use within
4218
 *                 the SNI callback or the certificate selection callback.
4219
 *
4220
 * \param ssl      SSL context
4221
 * \param authmode MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_NONE, MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_OPTIONAL or
4222
 *                 MBEDTLS_SSL_VERIFY_REQUIRED
4223
 */
4224
void mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_authmode(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
4225
                                 int authmode);
4226
4227
/**
4228
 * \brief          Set server side ServerName TLS extension callback
4229
 *                 (optional, server-side only).
4230
 *
4231
 *                 If set, the ServerName callback is called whenever the
4232
 *                 server receives a ServerName TLS extension from the client
4233
 *                 during a handshake. The ServerName callback has the
4234
 *                 following parameters: (void *parameter, mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
4235
 *                 const unsigned char *hostname, size_t len). If a suitable
4236
 *                 certificate is found, the callback must set the
4237
 *                 certificate(s) and key(s) to use with \c
4238
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_own_cert() (can be called repeatedly),
4239
 *                 and may optionally adjust the CA and associated CRL with \c
4240
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_ca_chain() as well as the client
4241
 *                 authentication mode with \c mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_authmode(),
4242
 *                 then must return 0. If no matching name is found, the
4243
 *                 callback may return non-zero to abort the handshake.
4244
 *
4245
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
4246
 * \param f_sni    verification function
4247
 * \param p_sni    verification parameter
4248
 */
4249
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_sni(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
4250
                          int (*f_sni)(void *, mbedtls_ssl_context *, const unsigned char *,
4251
                                       size_t),
4252
                          void *p_sni);
4253
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SERVER_NAME_INDICATION */
4254
4255
#if defined(MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_ECJPAKE_ENABLED)
4256
/**
4257
 * \brief          Set the EC J-PAKE password for current handshake.
4258
 *
4259
 * \note           An internal copy is made, and destroyed as soon as the
4260
 *                 handshake is completed, or when the SSL context is reset or
4261
 *                 freed.
4262
 *
4263
 * \note           The SSL context needs to be already set up. The right place
4264
 *                 to call this function is between \c mbedtls_ssl_setup() or
4265
 *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_reset() and \c mbedtls_ssl_handshake().
4266
 *                 Password cannot be empty (see RFC 8236).
4267
 *
4268
 * \param ssl      SSL context
4269
 * \param pw       EC J-PAKE password (pre-shared secret). It cannot be empty
4270
 * \param pw_len   length of pw in bytes
4271
 *
4272
 * \return         0 on success, or a negative error code.
4273
 */
4274
int mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_ecjpake_password(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
4275
                                        const unsigned char *pw,
4276
                                        size_t pw_len);
4277
4278
/**
4279
 * \brief          Set the EC J-PAKE opaque password for current handshake.
4280
 *
4281
 * \note           The key must remain valid until the handshake is over.
4282
 *
4283
 * \note           The SSL context needs to be already set up. The right place
4284
 *                 to call this function is between \c mbedtls_ssl_setup() or
4285
 *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_reset() and \c mbedtls_ssl_handshake().
4286
 *
4287
 * \param ssl      SSL context
4288
 * \param pwd      EC J-PAKE opaque password
4289
 *
4290
 * \return         0 on success, or a negative error code.
4291
 */
4292
int mbedtls_ssl_set_hs_ecjpake_password_opaque(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
4293
                                               mbedtls_svc_key_id_t pwd);
4294
#endif /*MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_ECJPAKE_ENABLED */
4295
4296
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_ALPN)
4297
/**
4298
 * \brief          Set the supported Application Layer Protocols.
4299
 *
4300
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
4301
 * \param protos   Pointer to a NULL-terminated list of supported protocols,
4302
 *                 in decreasing preference order. The pointer to the list is
4303
 *                 recorded by the library for later reference as required, so
4304
 *                 the lifetime of the table must be at least as long as the
4305
 *                 lifetime of the SSL configuration structure.
4306
 *
4307
 * \return         0 on success, or MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA.
4308
 */
4309
int mbedtls_ssl_conf_alpn_protocols(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, const char **protos);
4310
4311
/**
4312
 * \brief          Get the name of the negotiated Application Layer Protocol.
4313
 *                 This function should be called after the handshake is
4314
 *                 completed.
4315
 *
4316
 * \param ssl      SSL context
4317
 *
4318
 * \return         Protocol name, or NULL if no protocol was negotiated.
4319
 */
4320
const char *mbedtls_ssl_get_alpn_protocol(const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
4321
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_ALPN */
4322
4323
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_SRTP)
4324
#if defined(MBEDTLS_DEBUG_C)
4325
static inline const char *mbedtls_ssl_get_srtp_profile_as_string(mbedtls_ssl_srtp_profile profile)
4326
{
4327
    switch (profile) {
4328
        case MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_AES128_CM_HMAC_SHA1_80:
4329
            return "MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_AES128_CM_HMAC_SHA1_80";
4330
        case MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_AES128_CM_HMAC_SHA1_32:
4331
            return "MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_AES128_CM_HMAC_SHA1_32";
4332
        case MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_NULL_HMAC_SHA1_80:
4333
            return "MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_NULL_HMAC_SHA1_80";
4334
        case MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_NULL_HMAC_SHA1_32:
4335
            return "MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_NULL_HMAC_SHA1_32";
4336
        default: break;
4337
    }
4338
    return "";
4339
}
4340
#endif /* MBEDTLS_DEBUG_C */
4341
/**
4342
 * \brief                   Manage support for mki(master key id) value
4343
 *                          in use_srtp extension.
4344
 *                          MKI is an optional part of SRTP used for key management
4345
 *                          and re-keying. See RFC3711 section 3.1 for details.
4346
 *                          The default value is
4347
 *                          #MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_SRTP_MKI_UNSUPPORTED.
4348
 *
4349
 * \param conf              The SSL configuration to manage mki support.
4350
 * \param support_mki_value Enable or disable mki usage. Values are
4351
 *                          #MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_SRTP_MKI_UNSUPPORTED
4352
 *                          or #MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_SRTP_MKI_SUPPORTED.
4353
 */
4354
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_srtp_mki_value_supported(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
4355
                                               int support_mki_value);
4356
4357
/**
4358
 * \brief                   Set the supported DTLS-SRTP protection profiles.
4359
 *
4360
 * \param conf              SSL configuration
4361
 * \param profiles          Pointer to a List of MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_UNSET terminated
4362
 *                          supported protection profiles
4363
 *                          in decreasing preference order.
4364
 *                          The pointer to the list is recorded by the library
4365
 *                          for later reference as required, so the lifetime
4366
 *                          of the table must be at least as long as the lifetime
4367
 *                          of the SSL configuration structure.
4368
 *                          The list must not hold more than
4369
 *                          MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_MAX_PROFILE_LIST_LENGTH elements
4370
 *                          (excluding the terminating MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_UNSET).
4371
 *
4372
 * \return                  0 on success
4373
 * \return                  #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA when the list of
4374
 *                          protection profiles is incorrect.
4375
 */
4376
int mbedtls_ssl_conf_dtls_srtp_protection_profiles
4377
    (mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
4378
    const mbedtls_ssl_srtp_profile *profiles);
4379
4380
/**
4381
 * \brief                  Set the mki_value for the current DTLS-SRTP session.
4382
 *
4383
 * \param ssl              SSL context to use.
4384
 * \param mki_value        The MKI value to set.
4385
 * \param mki_len          The length of the MKI value.
4386
 *
4387
 * \note                   This function is relevant on client side only.
4388
 *                         The server discovers the mki value during handshake.
4389
 *                         A mki value set on server side using this function
4390
 *                         is ignored.
4391
 *
4392
 * \return                 0 on success
4393
 * \return                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA
4394
 * \return                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_FEATURE_UNAVAILABLE
4395
 */
4396
int mbedtls_ssl_dtls_srtp_set_mki_value(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
4397
                                        unsigned char *mki_value,
4398
                                        uint16_t mki_len);
4399
/**
4400
 * \brief                  Get the negotiated DTLS-SRTP information:
4401
 *                         Protection profile and MKI value.
4402
 *
4403
 * \warning                This function must be called after the handshake is
4404
 *                         completed. The value returned by this function must
4405
 *                         not be trusted or acted upon before the handshake completes.
4406
 *
4407
 * \param ssl              The SSL context to query.
4408
 * \param dtls_srtp_info   The negotiated DTLS-SRTP information:
4409
 *                         - Protection profile in use.
4410
 *                         A direct mapping of the iana defined value for protection
4411
 *                         profile on an uint16_t.
4412
                   http://www.iana.org/assignments/srtp-protection/srtp-protection.xhtml
4413
 *                         #MBEDTLS_TLS_SRTP_UNSET if the use of SRTP was not negotiated
4414
 *                         or peer's Hello packet was not parsed yet.
4415
 *                         - mki size and value( if size is > 0 ).
4416
 */
4417
void mbedtls_ssl_get_dtls_srtp_negotiation_result(const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
4418
                                                  mbedtls_dtls_srtp_info *dtls_srtp_info);
4419
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_DTLS_SRTP */
4420
4421
#if !defined(MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED_REMOVED)
4422
/**
4423
 * \brief          Set the maximum supported version sent from the client side
4424
 *                 and/or accepted at the server side.
4425
 *
4426
 *                 See also the documentation of mbedtls_ssl_conf_min_version().
4427
 *
4428
 * \note           This ignores ciphersuites from higher versions.
4429
 *
4430
 * \note           This function is deprecated and has been replaced by
4431
 *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_max_tls_version().
4432
 *
4433
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
4434
 * \param major    Major version number (#MBEDTLS_SSL_MAJOR_VERSION_3)
4435
 * \param minor    Minor version number
4436
 *                 (#MBEDTLS_SSL_MINOR_VERSION_3 for (D)TLS 1.2,
4437
 *                 #MBEDTLS_SSL_MINOR_VERSION_4 for TLS 1.3)
4438
 */
4439
void MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED mbedtls_ssl_conf_max_version(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, int major,
4440
                                                     int minor);
4441
#endif /* MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED_REMOVED */
4442
4443
/**
4444
 * \brief          Set the maximum supported version sent from the client side
4445
 *                 and/or accepted at the server side.
4446
 *
4447
 * \note           After the handshake, you can call
4448
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_get_version_number() to see what version was
4449
 *                 negotiated.
4450
 *
4451
 * \param conf         SSL configuration
4452
 * \param tls_version  TLS protocol version number (\c mbedtls_ssl_protocol_version)
4453
 *                     (#MBEDTLS_SSL_VERSION_UNKNOWN is not valid)
4454
 */
4455
static inline void mbedtls_ssl_conf_max_tls_version(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
4456
                                                    mbedtls_ssl_protocol_version tls_version)
4457
0
{
4458
0
    conf->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(max_tls_version) = tls_version;
4459
0
}
4460
4461
#if !defined(MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED_REMOVED)
4462
/**
4463
 * \brief          Set the minimum accepted SSL/TLS protocol version
4464
 *
4465
 * \note           By default, all supported versions are accepted.
4466
 *                 Future versions of the library may disable older
4467
 *                 protocol versions by default if they become deprecated.
4468
 *
4469
 * \note           The following versions are supported (if enabled at
4470
 *                 compile time):
4471
 *                 - (D)TLS 1.2: \p major = #MBEDTLS_SSL_MAJOR_VERSION_3,
4472
 *                   \p minor = #MBEDTLS_SSL_MINOR_VERSION_3
4473
 *                 - TLS 1.3: \p major = #MBEDTLS_SSL_MAJOR_VERSION_3,
4474
 *                   \p minor = #MBEDTLS_SSL_MINOR_VERSION_4
4475
 *
4476
 *                 Note that the numbers in the constant names are the
4477
 *                 TLS internal protocol numbers, and the minor versions
4478
 *                 differ by one from the human-readable versions!
4479
 *
4480
 * \note           Input outside of the SSL_MAX_XXXXX_VERSION and
4481
 *                 SSL_MIN_XXXXX_VERSION range is ignored.
4482
 *
4483
 * \note           After the handshake, you can call
4484
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_get_version_number() to see what version was
4485
 *                 negotiated.
4486
 *
4487
 * \note           This function is deprecated and has been replaced by
4488
 *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_min_tls_version().
4489
 *
4490
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
4491
 * \param major    Major version number (#MBEDTLS_SSL_MAJOR_VERSION_3)
4492
 * \param minor    Minor version number
4493
 *                 (#MBEDTLS_SSL_MINOR_VERSION_3 for (D)TLS 1.2,
4494
 *                 #MBEDTLS_SSL_MINOR_VERSION_4 for TLS 1.3)
4495
 */
4496
void MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED mbedtls_ssl_conf_min_version(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, int major,
4497
                                                     int minor);
4498
#endif /* MBEDTLS_DEPRECATED_REMOVED */
4499
4500
/**
4501
 * \brief          Set the minimum supported version sent from the client side
4502
 *                 and/or accepted at the server side.
4503
 *
4504
 * \note           After the handshake, you can call
4505
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_get_version_number() to see what version was
4506
 *                 negotiated.
4507
 *
4508
 * \param conf         SSL configuration
4509
 * \param tls_version  TLS protocol version number (\c mbedtls_ssl_protocol_version)
4510
 *                     (#MBEDTLS_SSL_VERSION_UNKNOWN is not valid)
4511
 */
4512
static inline void mbedtls_ssl_conf_min_tls_version(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
4513
                                                    mbedtls_ssl_protocol_version tls_version)
4514
0
{
4515
0
    conf->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(min_tls_version) = tls_version;
4516
0
}
4517
4518
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_ENCRYPT_THEN_MAC)
4519
/**
4520
 * \brief           Enable or disable Encrypt-then-MAC
4521
 *                  (Default: MBEDTLS_SSL_ETM_ENABLED)
4522
 *
4523
 * \note            This should always be enabled, it is a security
4524
 *                  improvement, and should not cause any interoperability
4525
 *                  issue (used only if the peer supports it too).
4526
 *
4527
 * \param conf      SSL configuration
4528
 * \param etm       MBEDTLS_SSL_ETM_ENABLED or MBEDTLS_SSL_ETM_DISABLED
4529
 */
4530
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_encrypt_then_mac(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, char etm);
4531
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_ENCRYPT_THEN_MAC */
4532
4533
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_EXTENDED_MASTER_SECRET)
4534
/**
4535
 * \brief           Enable or disable Extended Master Secret negotiation.
4536
 *                  (Default: MBEDTLS_SSL_EXTENDED_MS_ENABLED)
4537
 *
4538
 * \note            This should always be enabled, it is a security fix to the
4539
 *                  protocol, and should not cause any interoperability issue
4540
 *                  (used only if the peer supports it too).
4541
 *
4542
 * \param conf      SSL configuration
4543
 * \param ems       MBEDTLS_SSL_EXTENDED_MS_ENABLED or MBEDTLS_SSL_EXTENDED_MS_DISABLED
4544
 */
4545
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_extended_master_secret(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, char ems);
4546
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_EXTENDED_MASTER_SECRET */
4547
4548
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
4549
/**
4550
 * \brief          Whether to send a list of acceptable CAs in
4551
 *                 CertificateRequest messages.
4552
 *                 (Default: do send)
4553
 *
4554
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
4555
 * \param cert_req_ca_list   MBEDTLS_SSL_CERT_REQ_CA_LIST_ENABLED or
4556
 *                          MBEDTLS_SSL_CERT_REQ_CA_LIST_DISABLED
4557
 */
4558
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_cert_req_ca_list(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
4559
                                       char cert_req_ca_list);
4560
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C */
4561
4562
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAGMENT_LENGTH)
4563
/**
4564
 * \brief          Set the maximum fragment length to emit and/or negotiate.
4565
 *                 (Typical: the smaller of #MBEDTLS_SSL_IN_CONTENT_LEN and
4566
 *                 #MBEDTLS_SSL_OUT_CONTENT_LEN, usually `2^14` bytes)
4567
 *                 (Server: set maximum fragment length to emit,
4568
 *                 usually negotiated by the client during handshake)
4569
 *                 (Client: set maximum fragment length to emit *and*
4570
 *                 negotiate with the server during handshake)
4571
 *                 (Default: #MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAG_LEN_NONE)
4572
 *
4573
 * \note           On the client side, the maximum fragment length extension
4574
 *                 *will not* be used, unless the maximum fragment length has
4575
 *                 been set via this function to a value different than
4576
 *                 #MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAG_LEN_NONE.
4577
 *
4578
 * \note           With TLS, this currently only affects ApplicationData (sent
4579
 *                 with \c mbedtls_ssl_read()), not handshake messages.
4580
 *                 With DTLS, this affects both ApplicationData and handshake.
4581
 *
4582
 * \note           Defragmentation of TLS handshake messages is supported
4583
 *                 with some limitations. See the documentation of
4584
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_handshake() for details.
4585
 *
4586
 * \note           This sets the maximum length for a record's payload,
4587
 *                 excluding record overhead that will be added to it, see
4588
 *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_get_record_expansion().
4589
 *
4590
 * \note           For DTLS, it is also possible to set a limit for the total
4591
 *                 size of datagrams passed to the transport layer, including
4592
 *                 record overhead, see \c mbedtls_ssl_set_mtu().
4593
 *
4594
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
4595
 * \param mfl_code Code for maximum fragment length (allowed values:
4596
 *                 MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAG_LEN_512,  MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAG_LEN_1024,
4597
 *                 MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAG_LEN_2048, MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAG_LEN_4096)
4598
 *
4599
 * \return         0 if successful or MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA
4600
 */
4601
int mbedtls_ssl_conf_max_frag_len(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, unsigned char mfl_code);
4602
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_FRAGMENT_LENGTH */
4603
4604
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
4605
/**
4606
 * \brief          Pick the ciphersuites order according to the second parameter
4607
 *                 in the SSL Server module (MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C).
4608
 *                 (Default, if never called: MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_CIPHERSUITE_ORDER_SERVER)
4609
 *
4610
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
4611
 * \param order    Server or client (MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_CIPHERSUITE_ORDER_SERVER
4612
 *                                or MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_CIPHERSUITE_ORDER_CLIENT)
4613
 */
4614
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_preference_order(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, int order);
4615
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C */
4616
4617
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS) && defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C)
4618
/**
4619
 * \brief          Enable / Disable TLS 1.2 session tickets (client only,
4620
 *                 TLS 1.2 only). Enabled by default.
4621
 *
4622
 * \note           On server, use \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_session_tickets_cb().
4623
 *
4624
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
4625
 * \param use_tickets   Enable or disable (#MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS_ENABLED or
4626
 *                                         #MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS_DISABLED)
4627
 */
4628
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_session_tickets(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, int use_tickets);
4629
4630
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3)
4631
/**
4632
 * \brief Enable / Disable handling of TLS 1.3 NewSessionTicket messages
4633
 *        (client only, TLS 1.3 only).
4634
 *
4635
 *        The handling of TLS 1.3 NewSessionTicket messages is disabled by
4636
 *        default.
4637
 *
4638
 *        In TLS 1.3, servers may send a NewSessionTicket message at any time,
4639
 *        and may send multiple NewSessionTicket messages. By default, TLS 1.3
4640
 *        clients ignore NewSessionTicket messages.
4641
 *
4642
 *        To support session tickets in TLS 1.3 clients, call this function
4643
 *        with #MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_SIGNAL_NEW_SESSION_TICKETS_ENABLED. When
4644
 *        this is enabled, when a client receives a NewSessionTicket message,
4645
 *        the next call to a message processing functions (notably
4646
 *        mbedtls_ssl_handshake() and mbedtls_ssl_read()) will return
4647
 *        #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_NEW_SESSION_TICKET. The client should then
4648
 *        call mbedtls_ssl_get_session() to retrieve the session ticket before
4649
 *        calling the same message processing function again.
4650
 *
4651
 * \param conf  SSL configuration
4652
 * \param signal_new_session_tickets Enable or disable
4653
 *                                   (#MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_SIGNAL_NEW_SESSION_TICKETS_ENABLED or
4654
 *                                    #MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_SIGNAL_NEW_SESSION_TICKETS_DISABLED)
4655
 */
4656
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_tls13_enable_signal_new_session_tickets(
4657
    mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, int signal_new_session_tickets);
4658
4659
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3 */
4660
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS && MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C */
4661
4662
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS) && \
4663
    defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C) && \
4664
    defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3)
4665
/**
4666
 * \brief   Number of NewSessionTicket messages for the server to send
4667
 *          after handshake completion.
4668
 *
4669
 * \note    The default value is
4670
 *          \c MBEDTLS_SSL_TLS1_3_DEFAULT_NEW_SESSION_TICKETS.
4671
 *
4672
 * \note    In case of a session resumption, this setting only partially apply.
4673
 *          At most one ticket is sent in that case to just renew the pool of
4674
 *          tickets of the client. The rationale is to avoid the number of
4675
 *          tickets on the server to become rapidly out of control when the
4676
 *          server has the same configuration for all its connection instances.
4677
 *
4678
 * \param conf    SSL configuration
4679
 * \param num_tickets    Number of NewSessionTicket.
4680
 *
4681
 */
4682
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_new_session_tickets(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
4683
                                          uint16_t num_tickets);
4684
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS &&
4685
          MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C &&
4686
          MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_3*/
4687
4688
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION)
4689
/**
4690
 * \brief          Enable / Disable renegotiation support for connection when
4691
 *                 initiated by peer
4692
 *                 (Default: MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION_DISABLED)
4693
 *
4694
 * \warning        It is recommended to always disable renegotiation unless you
4695
 *                 know you need it and you know what you're doing. In the
4696
 *                 past, there have been several issues associated with
4697
 *                 renegotiation or a poor understanding of its properties.
4698
 *
4699
 * \note           Server-side, enabling renegotiation also makes the server
4700
 *                 susceptible to a resource DoS by a malicious client.
4701
 *
4702
 * \param conf    SSL configuration
4703
 * \param renegotiation     Enable or disable (MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION_ENABLED or
4704
 *                                             MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION_DISABLED)
4705
 */
4706
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_renegotiation(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, int renegotiation);
4707
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION */
4708
4709
/**
4710
 * \brief          Prevent or allow legacy renegotiation.
4711
 *                 (Default: MBEDTLS_SSL_LEGACY_NO_RENEGOTIATION)
4712
 *
4713
 *                 MBEDTLS_SSL_LEGACY_NO_RENEGOTIATION allows connections to
4714
 *                 be established even if the peer does not support
4715
 *                 secure renegotiation, but does not allow renegotiation
4716
 *                 to take place if not secure.
4717
 *                 (Interoperable and secure option)
4718
 *
4719
 *                 MBEDTLS_SSL_LEGACY_ALLOW_RENEGOTIATION allows renegotiations
4720
 *                 with non-upgraded peers. Allowing legacy renegotiation
4721
 *                 makes the connection vulnerable to specific man in the
4722
 *                 middle attacks. (See RFC 5746)
4723
 *                 (Most interoperable and least secure option)
4724
 *
4725
 *                 MBEDTLS_SSL_LEGACY_BREAK_HANDSHAKE breaks off connections
4726
 *                 if peer does not support secure renegotiation. Results
4727
 *                 in interoperability issues with non-upgraded peers
4728
 *                 that do not support renegotiation altogether.
4729
 *                 (Most secure option, interoperability issues)
4730
 *
4731
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
4732
 * \param allow_legacy  Prevent or allow (SSL_NO_LEGACY_RENEGOTIATION,
4733
 *                                        SSL_ALLOW_LEGACY_RENEGOTIATION or
4734
 *                                        MBEDTLS_SSL_LEGACY_BREAK_HANDSHAKE)
4735
 */
4736
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_legacy_renegotiation(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, int allow_legacy);
4737
4738
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION)
4739
/**
4740
 * \brief          Enforce renegotiation requests.
4741
 *                 (Default: enforced, max_records = 16)
4742
 *
4743
 *                 When we request a renegotiation, the peer can comply or
4744
 *                 ignore the request. This function allows us to decide
4745
 *                 whether to enforce our renegotiation requests by closing
4746
 *                 the connection if the peer doesn't comply.
4747
 *
4748
 *                 However, records could already be in transit from the peer
4749
 *                 when the request is emitted. In order to increase
4750
 *                 reliability, we can accept a number of records before the
4751
 *                 expected handshake records.
4752
 *
4753
 *                 The optimal value is highly dependent on the specific usage
4754
 *                 scenario.
4755
 *
4756
 * \note           With DTLS and server-initiated renegotiation, the
4757
 *                 HelloRequest is retransmitted every time mbedtls_ssl_read() times
4758
 *                 out or receives Application Data, until:
4759
 *                 - max_records records have beens seen, if it is >= 0, or
4760
 *                 - the number of retransmits that would happen during an
4761
 *                 actual handshake has been reached.
4762
 *                 Please remember the request might be lost a few times
4763
 *                 if you consider setting max_records to a really low value.
4764
 *
4765
 * \warning        On client, the grace period can only happen during
4766
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_read(), as opposed to mbedtls_ssl_write() and mbedtls_ssl_renegotiate()
4767
 *                 which always behave as if max_record was 0. The reason is,
4768
 *                 if we receive application data from the server, we need a
4769
 *                 place to write it, which only happens during mbedtls_ssl_read().
4770
 *
4771
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
4772
 * \param max_records Use MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION_NOT_ENFORCED if you don't want to
4773
 *                 enforce renegotiation, or a non-negative value to enforce
4774
 *                 it but allow for a grace period of max_records records.
4775
 */
4776
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_renegotiation_enforced(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf, int max_records);
4777
4778
/**
4779
 * \brief          Set record counter threshold for periodic renegotiation.
4780
 *                 (Default: 2^48 - 1)
4781
 *
4782
 *                 Renegotiation is automatically triggered when a record
4783
 *                 counter (outgoing or incoming) crosses the defined
4784
 *                 threshold. The default value is meant to prevent the
4785
 *                 connection from being closed when the counter is about to
4786
 *                 reached its maximal value (it is not allowed to wrap).
4787
 *
4788
 *                 Lower values can be used to enforce policies such as "keys
4789
 *                 must be refreshed every N packets with cipher X".
4790
 *
4791
 *                 The renegotiation period can be disabled by setting
4792
 *                 conf->disable_renegotiation to
4793
 *                 MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION_DISABLED.
4794
 *
4795
 * \note           When the configured transport is
4796
 *                 MBEDTLS_SSL_TRANSPORT_DATAGRAM the maximum renegotiation
4797
 *                 period is 2^48 - 1, and for MBEDTLS_SSL_TRANSPORT_STREAM,
4798
 *                 the maximum renegotiation period is 2^64 - 1.
4799
 *
4800
 * \param conf     SSL configuration
4801
 * \param period   The threshold value: a big-endian 64-bit number.
4802
 */
4803
void mbedtls_ssl_conf_renegotiation_period(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
4804
                                           const unsigned char period[8]);
4805
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION */
4806
4807
/**
4808
 * \brief          Check if there is data already read from the
4809
 *                 underlying transport but not yet processed.
4810
 *
4811
 * \param ssl      SSL context
4812
 *
4813
 * \return         0 if nothing's pending, 1 otherwise.
4814
 *
4815
 * \note           This is different in purpose and behaviour from
4816
 *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_get_bytes_avail in that it considers
4817
 *                 any kind of unprocessed data, not only unread
4818
 *                 application data. If \c mbedtls_ssl_get_bytes
4819
 *                 returns a non-zero value, this function will
4820
 *                 also signal pending data, but the converse does
4821
 *                 not hold. For example, in DTLS there might be
4822
 *                 further records waiting to be processed from
4823
 *                 the current underlying transport's datagram.
4824
 *
4825
 * \note           If this function returns 1 (data pending), this
4826
 *                 does not imply that a subsequent call to
4827
 *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_read will provide any data;
4828
 *                 e.g., the unprocessed data might turn out
4829
 *                 to be an alert or a handshake message.
4830
 *
4831
 * \note           This function is useful in the following situation:
4832
 *                 If the SSL/TLS module successfully returns from an
4833
 *                 operation - e.g. a handshake or an application record
4834
 *                 read - and you're awaiting incoming data next, you
4835
 *                 must not immediately idle on the underlying transport
4836
 *                 to have data ready, but you need to check the value
4837
 *                 of this function first. The reason is that the desired
4838
 *                 data might already be read but not yet processed.
4839
 *                 If, in contrast, a previous call to the SSL/TLS module
4840
 *                 returned MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ, it is not necessary
4841
 *                 to call this function, as the latter error code entails
4842
 *                 that all internal data has been processed.
4843
 *
4844
 */
4845
int mbedtls_ssl_check_pending(const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
4846
4847
/**
4848
 * \brief          Return the number of application data bytes
4849
 *                 remaining to be read from the current record.
4850
 *
4851
 * \param ssl      SSL context
4852
 *
4853
 * \return         How many bytes are available in the application
4854
 *                 data record read buffer.
4855
 *
4856
 * \note           When working over a datagram transport, this is
4857
 *                 useful to detect the current datagram's boundary
4858
 *                 in case \c mbedtls_ssl_read has written the maximal
4859
 *                 amount of data fitting into the input buffer.
4860
 *
4861
 */
4862
size_t mbedtls_ssl_get_bytes_avail(const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
4863
4864
/**
4865
 * \brief          Return the result of the certificate verification
4866
 *
4867
 * \param ssl      The SSL context to use.
4868
 *
4869
 * \return         \c 0 if the certificate verification was successful.
4870
 * \return         \c -1u if the result is not available. This may happen
4871
 *                 e.g. if the handshake aborts early, or a verification
4872
 *                 callback returned a fatal error.
4873
 * \return         A bitwise combination of \c MBEDTLS_X509_BADCERT_XXX
4874
 *                 and \c MBEDTLS_X509_BADCRL_XXX failure flags; see x509.h.
4875
 */
4876
uint32_t mbedtls_ssl_get_verify_result(const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
4877
4878
/**
4879
 * \brief          Return the id of the current ciphersuite
4880
 *
4881
 * \param ssl      SSL context
4882
 *
4883
 * \return         a ciphersuite id
4884
 */
4885
int mbedtls_ssl_get_ciphersuite_id_from_ssl(const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
4886
4887
/**
4888
 * \brief          Return the name of the current ciphersuite
4889
 *
4890
 * \param ssl      SSL context
4891
 *
4892
 * \return         a string containing the ciphersuite name
4893
 */
4894
const char *mbedtls_ssl_get_ciphersuite(const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
4895
4896
4897
/**
4898
 * \brief          Return the (D)TLS protocol version negotiated in the
4899
 *                 given connection.
4900
 *
4901
 * \note           If you call this function too early during the initial
4902
 *                 handshake, before the two sides have agreed on a version,
4903
 *                 this function returns #MBEDTLS_SSL_VERSION_UNKNOWN.
4904
 *
4905
 * \param ssl      The SSL context to query.
4906
 * \return         The negotiated protocol version.
4907
 */
4908
static inline mbedtls_ssl_protocol_version mbedtls_ssl_get_version_number(
4909
    const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl)
4910
0
{
4911
0
    return ssl->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(tls_version);
4912
0
}
4913
4914
/**
4915
 * \brief          Return the current TLS version
4916
 *
4917
 * \param ssl      SSL context
4918
 *
4919
 * \return         a string containing the TLS version
4920
 */
4921
const char *mbedtls_ssl_get_version(const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
4922
4923
/**
4924
 * \brief          Return the (maximum) number of bytes added by the record
4925
 *                 layer: header + encryption/MAC overhead (inc. padding)
4926
 *
4927
 * \param ssl      SSL context
4928
 *
4929
 * \return         Current maximum record expansion in bytes
4930
 */
4931
int mbedtls_ssl_get_record_expansion(const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
4932
4933
/**
4934
 * \brief          Return the current maximum outgoing record payload in bytes.
4935
 *
4936
 * \note           The logic to determine the maximum outgoing record payload is
4937
 *                 version-specific. It takes into account various factors, such as
4938
 *                 the mbedtls_config.h setting \c MBEDTLS_SSL_OUT_CONTENT_LEN, extensions
4939
 *                 such as the max fragment length or record size limit extension if
4940
 *                 used, and for DTLS the path MTU as configured and current
4941
 *                 record expansion.
4942
 *
4943
 * \note           With DTLS, \c mbedtls_ssl_write() will return an error if
4944
 *                 called with a larger length value.
4945
 *                 With TLS, \c mbedtls_ssl_write() will fragment the input if
4946
 *                 necessary and return the number of bytes written; it is up
4947
 *                 to the caller to call \c mbedtls_ssl_write() again in
4948
 *                 order to send the remaining bytes if any.
4949
 *
4950
 * \sa             mbedtls_ssl_get_max_out_record_payload()
4951
 * \sa             mbedtls_ssl_get_record_expansion()
4952
 *
4953
 * \param ssl      SSL context
4954
 *
4955
 * \return         Current maximum payload for an outgoing record,
4956
 *                 or a negative error code.
4957
 */
4958
int mbedtls_ssl_get_max_out_record_payload(const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
4959
4960
/**
4961
 * \brief          Return the current maximum incoming record payload in bytes.
4962
 *
4963
 * \note           The logic to determine the maximum incoming record payload is
4964
 *                 version-specific. It takes into account various factors, such as
4965
 *                 the mbedtls_config.h setting \c MBEDTLS_SSL_IN_CONTENT_LEN, extensions
4966
 *                 such as the max fragment length extension or record size limit
4967
 *                 extension if used, and the current record expansion.
4968
 *
4969
 * \sa             mbedtls_ssl_set_mtu()
4970
 * \sa             mbedtls_ssl_get_max_in_record_payload()
4971
 * \sa             mbedtls_ssl_get_record_expansion()
4972
 *
4973
 * \param ssl      SSL context
4974
 *
4975
 * \return         Current maximum payload for an incoming record,
4976
 *                 or a negative error code.
4977
 */
4978
int mbedtls_ssl_get_max_in_record_payload(const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
4979
4980
#if defined(MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C)
4981
/**
4982
 * \brief          Return the peer certificate from the current connection.
4983
 *
4984
 * \param  ssl     The SSL context to use. This must be initialized and setup.
4985
 *
4986
 * \return         The current peer certificate, if available.
4987
 *                 The returned certificate is owned by the SSL context and
4988
 *                 is valid only until the next call to the SSL API.
4989
 * \return         \c NULL if no peer certificate is available. This might
4990
 *                 be because the chosen ciphersuite doesn't use CRTs
4991
 *                 (PSK-based ciphersuites, for example), or because
4992
 *                 #MBEDTLS_SSL_KEEP_PEER_CERTIFICATE has been disabled,
4993
 *                 allowing the stack to free the peer's CRT to save memory.
4994
 *
4995
 * \note           For one-time inspection of the peer's certificate during
4996
 *                 the handshake, consider registering an X.509 CRT verification
4997
 *                 callback through mbedtls_ssl_conf_verify() instead of calling
4998
 *                 this function. Using mbedtls_ssl_conf_verify() also comes at
4999
 *                 the benefit of allowing you to influence the verification
5000
 *                 process, for example by masking expected and tolerated
5001
 *                 verification failures.
5002
 *
5003
 * \warning        You must not use the pointer returned by this function
5004
 *                 after any further call to the SSL API, including
5005
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_read() and mbedtls_ssl_write(); this is
5006
 *                 because the pointer might change during renegotiation,
5007
 *                 which happens transparently to the user.
5008
 *                 If you want to use the certificate across API calls,
5009
 *                 you must make a copy.
5010
 */
5011
const mbedtls_x509_crt *mbedtls_ssl_get_peer_cert(const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
5012
#endif /* MBEDTLS_X509_CRT_PARSE_C */
5013
5014
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C)
5015
/**
5016
 * \brief          Export a session in order to resume it later.
5017
 *
5018
 * \param ssl      The SSL context representing the connection for which to
5019
 *                 to export a session structure for later resumption.
5020
 * \param session  The target structure in which to store the exported session.
5021
 *                 This must have been initialized with mbedtls_ssl_session_init()
5022
 *                 but otherwise be unused.
5023
 *
5024
 * \note           This function can handle a variety of mechanisms for session
5025
 *                 resumption: For TLS 1.2, both session ID-based resumption and
5026
 *                 ticket-based resumption will be considered. For TLS 1.3,
5027
 *                 sessions equate to tickets, and if session tickets are
5028
 *                 enabled (see #MBEDTLS_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS configuration
5029
 *                 option), this function exports the last received ticket and
5030
 *                 the exported session may be used to resume the TLS 1.3
5031
 *                 session. If session tickets are disabled, exported sessions
5032
 *                 cannot be used to resume a TLS 1.3 session.
5033
 *
5034
 * \return         \c 0 if successful. In this case, \p session can be used for
5035
 *                 session resumption by passing it to mbedtls_ssl_set_session(),
5036
 *                 and serialized for storage via mbedtls_ssl_session_save().
5037
 * \return         Another negative error code on other kinds of failure.
5038
 *
5039
 * \sa             mbedtls_ssl_set_session()
5040
 * \sa             mbedtls_ssl_session_save()
5041
 */
5042
int mbedtls_ssl_get_session(const mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
5043
                            mbedtls_ssl_session *session);
5044
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C */
5045
5046
/**
5047
 * \brief          Perform the SSL handshake
5048
 *
5049
 * \param ssl      SSL context
5050
 *
5051
 * \return         \c 0 if successful.
5052
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ or #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_WRITE
5053
 *                 if the handshake is incomplete and waiting for data to
5054
 *                 be available for reading from or writing to the underlying
5055
 *                 transport - in this case you must call this function again
5056
 *                 when the underlying transport is ready for the operation.
5057
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ASYNC_IN_PROGRESS if an asynchronous
5058
 *                 operation is in progress (see
5059
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_conf_async_private_cb()) - in this case you
5060
 *                 must call this function again when the operation is ready.
5061
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CRYPTO_IN_PROGRESS if a cryptographic
5062
 *                 operation is in progress (see mbedtls_ecp_set_max_ops()) -
5063
 *                 in this case you must call this function again to complete
5064
 *                 the handshake when you're done attending other tasks.
5065
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_HELLO_VERIFY_REQUIRED if DTLS is in use
5066
 *                 and the client did not demonstrate reachability yet - in
5067
 *                 this case you must stop using the context (see below).
5068
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_NEW_SESSION_TICKET if a TLS 1.3
5069
 *                 NewSessionTicket message has been received. See the
5070
 *                 documentation of mbedtls_ssl_read() for more information
5071
 *                 about this error code.
5072
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_EARLY_DATA if early data, as
5073
 *                 defined in RFC 8446 (TLS 1.3 specification), has been
5074
 *                 received as part of the handshake. This is server specific
5075
 *                 and may occur only if the early data feature has been
5076
 *                 enabled on server (see mbedtls_ssl_conf_early_data()
5077
 *                 documentation). You must call mbedtls_ssl_read_early_data()
5078
 *                 to read the early data before resuming the handshake.
5079
 * \return         Another SSL error code - in this case you must stop using
5080
 *                 the context (see below).
5081
 *
5082
 * \warning        If this function returns something other than
5083
 *                 \c 0,
5084
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ,
5085
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_WRITE,
5086
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ASYNC_IN_PROGRESS or
5087
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CRYPTO_IN_PROGRESS or
5088
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_NEW_SESSION_TICKET or
5089
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_EARLY_DATA,
5090
 *                 you must stop using the SSL context for reading or writing,
5091
 *                 and either free it or call \c mbedtls_ssl_session_reset()
5092
 *                 on it before re-using it for a new connection; the current
5093
 *                 connection must be closed.
5094
 *
5095
 * \note           If DTLS is in use, then you may choose to handle
5096
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_HELLO_VERIFY_REQUIRED specially for logging
5097
 *                 purposes, as it is an expected return value rather than an
5098
 *                 actual error, but you still need to reset/free the context.
5099
 *
5100
 * \note           Remarks regarding event-driven DTLS:
5101
 *                 If the function returns #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ, no datagram
5102
 *                 from the underlying transport layer is currently being processed,
5103
 *                 and it is safe to idle until the timer or the underlying transport
5104
 *                 signal a new event. This is not true for a successful handshake,
5105
 *                 in which case the datagram of the underlying transport that is
5106
 *                 currently being processed might or might not contain further
5107
 *                 DTLS records.
5108
 *
5109
 * \note           If #MBEDTLS_USE_PSA_CRYPTO is enabled, the PSA crypto
5110
 *                 subsystem must have been initialized by calling
5111
 *                 psa_crypto_init() before calling this function.
5112
 *                 Otherwise, the handshake may call psa_crypto_init()
5113
 *                 if a negotiation involving TLS 1.3 takes place (this may
5114
 *                 be the case even if TLS 1.3 is offered but eventually
5115
 *                 not selected).
5116
 *
5117
 * \note           In TLS, reception of fragmented handshake messages is
5118
 *                 supported with some limitations (those limitations do
5119
 *                 not apply to DTLS, where defragmentation is fully
5120
 *                 supported):
5121
 *                 - The first fragment of a handshake message must be
5122
 *                   at least 4 bytes long.
5123
 *                 - Non-handshake records must not be interleaved between
5124
 *                   the fragments of a handshake message. (This is permitted
5125
 *                   in TLS 1.2 but not in TLS 1.3, but Mbed TLS rejects it
5126
 *                   even in TLS 1.2.)
5127
 */
5128
int mbedtls_ssl_handshake(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
5129
5130
/**
5131
 * \brief          After calling mbedtls_ssl_handshake() to start the SSL
5132
 *                 handshake you can call this function to check whether the
5133
 *                 handshake is over for a given SSL context. This function
5134
 *                 should be also used to determine when to stop calling
5135
 *                 mbedtls_handshake_step() for that context.
5136
 *
5137
 * \param ssl      SSL context
5138
 *
5139
 * \return         \c 1 if handshake is over, \c 0 if it is still ongoing.
5140
 */
5141
static inline int mbedtls_ssl_is_handshake_over(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl)
5142
0
{
5143
0
    return ssl->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(state) >= MBEDTLS_SSL_HANDSHAKE_OVER;
5144
0
}
5145
5146
/**
5147
 * \brief          Perform a single step of the SSL handshake
5148
 *
5149
 * \note           The state of the context (ssl->state) will be at
5150
 *                 the next state after this function returns \c 0. Do not
5151
 *                 call this function if mbedtls_ssl_is_handshake_over()
5152
 *                 returns \c 1.
5153
 *
5154
 * \warning        Whilst in the past you may have used direct access to the
5155
 *                 context state (ssl->state) in order to ascertain when to
5156
 *                 stop calling this function and although you can still do
5157
 *                 so with something like ssl->MBEDTLS_PRIVATE(state) or by
5158
 *                 defining MBEDTLS_ALLOW_PRIVATE_ACCESS, this is now
5159
 *                 considered deprecated and could be broken in any future
5160
 *                 release. If you still find you have good reason for such
5161
 *                 direct access, then please do contact the team to explain
5162
 *                 this (raise an issue or post to the mailing list), so that
5163
 *                 we can add a solution to your problem that will be
5164
 *                 guaranteed to work in the future.
5165
 *
5166
 * \param ssl      SSL context
5167
 *
5168
 * \return         See mbedtls_ssl_handshake().
5169
 *
5170
 * \warning        If this function returns something other than \c 0,
5171
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ, #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_WRITE,
5172
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ASYNC_IN_PROGRESS,
5173
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CRYPTO_IN_PROGRESS or
5174
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_NEW_SESSION_TICKET or
5175
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_EARLY_DATA, you must stop using
5176
 *                 the SSL context for reading or writing, and either free it
5177
 *                 or call \c mbedtls_ssl_session_reset() on it before
5178
 *                 re-using it for a new connection; the current connection
5179
 *                 must be closed.
5180
 */
5181
int mbedtls_ssl_handshake_step(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
5182
5183
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION)
5184
/**
5185
 * \brief          Initiate an SSL renegotiation on the running connection.
5186
 *                 Client: perform the renegotiation right now.
5187
 *                 Server: request renegotiation, which will be performed
5188
 *                 during the next call to mbedtls_ssl_read() if honored by
5189
 *                 client.
5190
 *
5191
 * \param ssl      SSL context
5192
 *
5193
 * \return         0 if successful, or any mbedtls_ssl_handshake() return
5194
 *                 value except #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CLIENT_RECONNECT that can't
5195
 *                 happen during a renegotiation.
5196
 *
5197
 * \warning        If this function returns something other than \c 0,
5198
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ, #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_WRITE,
5199
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ASYNC_IN_PROGRESS or
5200
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CRYPTO_IN_PROGRESS, you must stop using
5201
 *                 the SSL context for reading or writing, and either free it
5202
 *                 or call \c mbedtls_ssl_session_reset() on it before
5203
 *                 re-using it for a new connection; the current connection
5204
 *                 must be closed.
5205
 *
5206
 */
5207
int mbedtls_ssl_renegotiate(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
5208
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION */
5209
5210
/**
5211
 * \brief          Read at most 'len' application data bytes
5212
 *
5213
 * \param ssl      SSL context
5214
 * \param buf      buffer that will hold the data
5215
 * \param len      maximum number of bytes to read
5216
 *
5217
 * \return         The (positive) number of bytes read if successful.
5218
 * \return         \c 0 if the read end of the underlying transport was closed
5219
 *                 without sending a CloseNotify beforehand, which might happen
5220
 *                 because of various reasons (internal error of an underlying
5221
 *                 stack, non-conformant peer not sending a CloseNotify and
5222
 *                 such) - in this case you must stop using the context
5223
 *                 (see below).
5224
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_PEER_CLOSE_NOTIFY if the underlying
5225
 *                 transport is still functional, but the peer has
5226
 *                 acknowledged to not send anything anymore.
5227
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ or #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_WRITE
5228
 *                 if the handshake is incomplete and waiting for data to
5229
 *                 be available for reading from or writing to the underlying
5230
 *                 transport - in this case you must call this function again
5231
 *                 when the underlying transport is ready for the operation.
5232
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ASYNC_IN_PROGRESS if an asynchronous
5233
 *                 operation is in progress (see
5234
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_conf_async_private_cb()) - in this case you
5235
 *                 must call this function again when the operation is ready.
5236
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CRYPTO_IN_PROGRESS if a cryptographic
5237
 *                 operation is in progress (see mbedtls_ecp_set_max_ops()) -
5238
 *                 in this case you must call this function again to complete
5239
 *                 the handshake when you're done attending other tasks.
5240
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CLIENT_RECONNECT if we're at the server
5241
 *                 side of a DTLS connection and the client is initiating a
5242
 *                 new connection using the same source port. See below.
5243
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_NEW_SESSION_TICKET if a TLS 1.3
5244
 *                 NewSessionTicket message has been received.
5245
 *                 This error code is only returned on the client side. It is
5246
 *                 only returned if handling of TLS 1.3 NewSessionTicket
5247
 *                 messages has been enabled through
5248
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_conf_tls13_enable_signal_new_session_tickets().
5249
 *                 This error code indicates that a TLS 1.3 NewSessionTicket
5250
 *                 message has been received and parsed successfully by the
5251
 *                 client. The ticket data can be retrieved from the SSL
5252
 *                 context by calling mbedtls_ssl_get_session(). It remains
5253
 *                 available until the next call to mbedtls_ssl_read().
5254
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_EARLY_DATA if early data, as
5255
 *                 defined in RFC 8446 (TLS 1.3 specification), has been
5256
 *                 received as part of the handshake. This is server specific
5257
 *                 and may occur only if the early data feature has been
5258
 *                 enabled on server (see mbedtls_ssl_conf_early_data()
5259
 *                 documentation). You must call mbedtls_ssl_read_early_data()
5260
 *                 to read the early data before resuming the handshake.
5261
 * \return         Another SSL error code - in this case you must stop using
5262
 *                 the context (see below).
5263
 *
5264
 * \warning        If this function returns something other than
5265
 *                 a positive value,
5266
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ,
5267
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_WRITE,
5268
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ASYNC_IN_PROGRESS,
5269
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CRYPTO_IN_PROGRESS,
5270
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CLIENT_RECONNECT or
5271
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_NEW_SESSION_TICKET or
5272
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_EARLY_DATA,
5273
 *                 you must stop using the SSL context for reading or writing,
5274
 *                 and either free it or call \c mbedtls_ssl_session_reset()
5275
 *                 on it before re-using it for a new connection; the current
5276
 *                 connection must be closed.
5277
 *
5278
 * \note           When this function returns #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CLIENT_RECONNECT
5279
 *                 (which can only happen server-side), it means that a client
5280
 *                 is initiating a new connection using the same source port.
5281
 *                 You can either treat that as a connection close and wait
5282
 *                 for the client to resend a ClientHello, or directly
5283
 *                 continue with \c mbedtls_ssl_handshake() with the same
5284
 *                 context (as it has been reset internally). Either way, you
5285
 *                 must make sure this is seen by the application as a new
5286
 *                 connection: application state, if any, should be reset, and
5287
 *                 most importantly the identity of the client must be checked
5288
 *                 again. WARNING: not validating the identity of the client
5289
 *                 again, or not transmitting the new identity to the
5290
 *                 application layer, would allow authentication bypass!
5291
 *
5292
 * \note           Remarks regarding event-driven DTLS:
5293
 *                 - If the function returns #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ, no datagram
5294
 *                   from the underlying transport layer is currently being processed,
5295
 *                   and it is safe to idle until the timer or the underlying transport
5296
 *                   signal a new event.
5297
 *                 - This function may return MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ even if data was
5298
 *                   initially available on the underlying transport, as this data may have
5299
 *                   been only e.g. duplicated messages or a renegotiation request.
5300
 *                   Therefore, you must be prepared to receive MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ even
5301
 *                   when reacting to an incoming-data event from the underlying transport.
5302
 *                 - On success, the datagram of the underlying transport that is currently
5303
 *                   being processed may contain further DTLS records. You should call
5304
 *                   \c mbedtls_ssl_check_pending to check for remaining records.
5305
 *
5306
 */
5307
int mbedtls_ssl_read(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl, unsigned char *buf, size_t len);
5308
5309
/**
5310
 * \brief          Try to write exactly 'len' application data bytes
5311
 *
5312
 * \warning        This function will do partial writes in some cases. If the
5313
 *                 return value is non-negative but less than length, the
5314
 *                 function must be called again with updated arguments:
5315
 *                 buf + ret, len - ret (if ret is the return value) until
5316
 *                 it returns a value equal to the last 'len' argument.
5317
 *
5318
 * \param ssl      SSL context
5319
 * \param buf      buffer holding the data
5320
 * \param len      how many bytes must be written
5321
 *
5322
 * \return         The (non-negative) number of bytes actually written if
5323
 *                 successful (may be less than \p len).
5324
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ or #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_WRITE
5325
 *                 if the handshake is incomplete and waiting for data to
5326
 *                 be available for reading from or writing to the underlying
5327
 *                 transport - in this case you must call this function again
5328
 *                 when the underlying transport is ready for the operation.
5329
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ASYNC_IN_PROGRESS if an asynchronous
5330
 *                 operation is in progress (see
5331
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_conf_async_private_cb()) - in this case you
5332
 *                 must call this function again when the operation is ready.
5333
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CRYPTO_IN_PROGRESS if a cryptographic
5334
 *                 operation is in progress (see mbedtls_ecp_set_max_ops()) -
5335
 *                 in this case you must call this function again to complete
5336
 *                 the handshake when you're done attending other tasks.
5337
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_NEW_SESSION_TICKET if a TLS 1.3
5338
 *                 NewSessionTicket message has been received. See the
5339
 *                 documentation of mbedtls_ssl_read() for more information
5340
 *                 about this error code.
5341
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_EARLY_DATA if early data, as
5342
 *                 defined in RFC 8446 (TLS 1.3 specification), has been
5343
 *                 received as part of the handshake. This is server specific
5344
 *                 and may occur only if the early data feature has been
5345
 *                 enabled on server (see mbedtls_ssl_conf_early_data()
5346
 *                 documentation). You must call mbedtls_ssl_read_early_data()
5347
 *                 to read the early data before resuming the handshake.
5348
 * \return         Another SSL error code - in this case you must stop using
5349
 *                 the context (see below).
5350
 *
5351
 * \warning        If this function returns something other than
5352
 *                 a non-negative value,
5353
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ,
5354
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_WRITE,
5355
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ASYNC_IN_PROGRESS,
5356
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CRYPTO_IN_PROGRESS or
5357
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_NEW_SESSION_TICKET or
5358
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_EARLY_DATA,
5359
 *                 you must stop using the SSL context for reading or writing,
5360
 *                 and either free it or call \c mbedtls_ssl_session_reset()
5361
 *                 on it before re-using it for a new connection; the current
5362
 *                 connection must be closed.
5363
 *
5364
 * \note           When this function returns #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_WRITE/READ,
5365
 *                 it must be called later with the *same* arguments,
5366
 *                 until it returns a value greater than or equal to 0. When
5367
 *                 the function returns #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_WRITE there may be
5368
 *                 some partial data in the output buffer, however this is not
5369
 *                 yet sent.
5370
 *
5371
 * \note           If the requested length is greater than the maximum
5372
 *                 fragment length (either the built-in limit or the one set
5373
 *                 or negotiated with the peer), then:
5374
 *                 - with TLS, less bytes than requested are written.
5375
 *                 - with DTLS, MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA is returned.
5376
 *                 \c mbedtls_ssl_get_max_out_record_payload() may be used to
5377
 *                 query the active maximum fragment length.
5378
 *
5379
 * \note           Attempting to write 0 bytes will result in an empty TLS
5380
 *                 application record being sent.
5381
 */
5382
int mbedtls_ssl_write(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl, const unsigned char *buf, size_t len);
5383
5384
/**
5385
 * \brief           Send an alert message
5386
 *
5387
 * \param ssl       SSL context
5388
 * \param level     The alert level of the message
5389
 *                  (MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_LEVEL_WARNING or MBEDTLS_SSL_ALERT_LEVEL_FATAL)
5390
 * \param message   The alert message (SSL_ALERT_MSG_*)
5391
 *
5392
 * \return          0 if successful, or a specific SSL error code.
5393
 *
5394
 * \note           If this function returns something other than 0 or
5395
 *                 MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ/WRITE, you must stop using
5396
 *                 the SSL context for reading or writing, and either free it or
5397
 *                 call \c mbedtls_ssl_session_reset() on it before re-using it
5398
 *                 for a new connection; the current connection must be closed.
5399
 */
5400
int mbedtls_ssl_send_alert_message(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
5401
                                   unsigned char level,
5402
                                   unsigned char message);
5403
/**
5404
 * \brief          Notify the peer that the connection is being closed
5405
 *
5406
 * \param ssl      SSL context
5407
 *
5408
 * \return          0 if successful, or a specific SSL error code.
5409
 *
5410
 * \note           If this function returns something other than 0 or
5411
 *                 MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_WANT_READ/WRITE, you must stop using
5412
 *                 the SSL context for reading or writing, and either free it or
5413
 *                 call \c mbedtls_ssl_session_reset() on it before re-using it
5414
 *                 for a new connection; the current connection must be closed.
5415
 */
5416
int mbedtls_ssl_close_notify(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
5417
5418
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA)
5419
5420
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C)
5421
/**
5422
 * \brief          Read at most 'len' bytes of early data
5423
 *
5424
 * \note           This API is server specific.
5425
 *
5426
 * \warning        Early data is defined in the TLS 1.3 specification, RFC 8446.
5427
 *                 IMPORTANT NOTE from section 2.3 of the specification:
5428
 *
5429
 *                 The security properties for 0-RTT data are weaker than
5430
 *                 those for other kinds of TLS data. Specifically:
5431
 *                 - This data is not forward secret, as it is encrypted
5432
 *                   solely under keys derived using the offered PSK.
5433
 *                 - There are no guarantees of non-replay between connections.
5434
 *                   Protection against replay for ordinary TLS 1.3 1-RTT data
5435
 *                   is provided via the server's Random value, but 0-RTT data
5436
 *                   does not depend on the ServerHello and therefore has
5437
 *                   weaker guarantees. This is especially relevant if the
5438
 *                   data is authenticated either with TLS client
5439
 *                   authentication or inside the application protocol. The
5440
 *                   same warnings apply to any use of the
5441
 *                   early_exporter_master_secret.
5442
 *
5443
 * \warning        Mbed TLS does not implement any of the anti-replay defenses
5444
 *                 defined in section 8 of the TLS 1.3 specification:
5445
 *                 single-use of tickets or ClientHello recording within a
5446
 *                 given time window.
5447
 *
5448
 * \note           This function is used in conjunction with
5449
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_handshake(), mbedtls_ssl_handshake_step(),
5450
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_read() and mbedtls_ssl_write() to read early
5451
 *                 data when these functions return
5452
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_EARLY_DATA.
5453
 *
5454
 * \param ssl      SSL context, it must have been initialized and set up.
5455
 * \param buf      buffer that will hold the data
5456
 * \param len      maximum number of bytes to read
5457
 *
5458
 * \return         The (positive) number of bytes read if successful.
5459
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA if input data is invalid.
5460
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CANNOT_READ_EARLY_DATA if it is not
5461
 *                 possible to read early data for the SSL context \p ssl. Note
5462
 *                 that this function is intended to be called for an SSL
5463
 *                 context \p ssl only after a call to mbedtls_ssl_handshake(),
5464
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_handshake_step(), mbedtls_ssl_read() or
5465
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_write() for \p ssl that has returned
5466
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_RECEIVED_EARLY_DATA.
5467
 */
5468
int mbedtls_ssl_read_early_data(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
5469
                                unsigned char *buf, size_t len);
5470
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_SRV_C */
5471
5472
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C)
5473
/**
5474
 * \brief          Try to write exactly 'len' application data bytes while
5475
 *                 performing the handshake (early data).
5476
 *
5477
 * \warning        Early data is defined in the TLS 1.3 specification, RFC 8446.
5478
 *                 IMPORTANT NOTE from section 2.3 of the specification:
5479
 *
5480
 *                 The security properties for 0-RTT data are weaker than
5481
 *                 those for other kinds of TLS data. Specifically:
5482
 *                 - This data is not forward secret, as it is encrypted
5483
 *                   solely under keys derived using the offered PSK.
5484
 *                 - There are no guarantees of non-replay between connections.
5485
 *                   Protection against replay for ordinary TLS 1.3 1-RTT data
5486
 *                   is provided via the server's Random value, but 0-RTT data
5487
 *                   does not depend on the ServerHello and therefore has
5488
 *                   weaker guarantees. This is especially relevant if the
5489
 *                   data is authenticated either with TLS client
5490
 *                   authentication or inside the application protocol. The
5491
 *                   same warnings apply to any use of the
5492
 *                   early_exporter_master_secret.
5493
 *
5494
 * \note           This function behaves mainly as mbedtls_ssl_write(). The
5495
 *                 specification of mbedtls_ssl_write() relevant to TLS 1.3
5496
 *                 (thus not the parts specific to (D)TLS1.2) applies to this
5497
 *                 function and the present documentation is mainly restricted
5498
 *                 to the differences with mbedtls_ssl_write(). One noticeable
5499
 *                 difference though is that mbedtls_ssl_write() aims to
5500
 *                 complete the handshake before to write application data
5501
 *                 while mbedtls_ssl_write_early() aims to drive the handshake
5502
 *                 just past the point where it is not possible to send early
5503
 *                 data anymore.
5504
 *
5505
 * \param ssl      SSL context
5506
 * \param buf      buffer holding the data
5507
 * \param len      how many bytes must be written
5508
 *
5509
 * \return         The (non-negative) number of bytes actually written if
5510
 *                 successful (may be less than \p len).
5511
 *
5512
 * \return         One additional specific error code compared to
5513
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_write():
5514
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CANNOT_WRITE_EARLY_DATA.
5515
 *
5516
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_CANNOT_WRITE_EARLY_DATA is returned when it
5517
 *                 is not possible to write early data for the SSL context
5518
 *                 \p ssl.
5519
 *
5520
 *                 It may have been possible and it is not possible
5521
 *                 anymore because the client received the server Finished
5522
 *                 message, the server rejected early data or the maximum
5523
 *                 number of allowed early data for the PSK in use has been
5524
 *                 reached.
5525
 *
5526
 *                 It may never have been possible and will never be possible
5527
 *                 for the SSL context \p ssl because the use of early data
5528
 *                 is disabled for that context or more generally the context
5529
 *                 is not suitably configured to enable early data or the first
5530
 *                 call to the function was done while the handshake was
5531
 *                 already completed.
5532
 *
5533
 *                 It is not possible to write early data for the SSL context
5534
 *                 \p ssl and any subsequent call to this API will return this
5535
 *                 error code. But this does not preclude for using it with
5536
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_write(), mbedtls_ssl_read() or
5537
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_handshake() and the handshake can be
5538
 *                 completed by calling one of these APIs.
5539
 *
5540
 * \note           This function may write early data only if the SSL context
5541
 *                 has been configured for the handshake with a PSK for which
5542
 *                 early data is allowed.
5543
 *
5544
 * \note           To maximize the number of early data that can be written in
5545
 *                 the course of the handshake, it is expected that this
5546
 *                 function starts the handshake for the SSL context \p ssl.
5547
 *                 But this is not mandatory.
5548
 *
5549
 * \note           This function does not provide any information on whether
5550
 *                 the server has accepted or will accept early data or not.
5551
 *                 When it returns a positive value, it just means that it
5552
 *                 has written early data to the server. To know whether the
5553
 *                 server has accepted early data or not, you should call
5554
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_get_early_data_status() with the handshake
5555
 *                 completed.
5556
 */
5557
int mbedtls_ssl_write_early_data(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
5558
                                 const unsigned char *buf, size_t len);
5559
5560
/**
5561
 * \brief Get the status of the negotiation of the use of early data.
5562
 *
5563
 * \param ssl      The SSL context to query
5564
 *
5565
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA if this function is called
5566
 *                 from the server-side.
5567
 *
5568
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA if this function is called
5569
 *                 prior to completion of the handshake.
5570
 *
5571
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_STATUS_NOT_INDICATED if the client
5572
 *                 has not indicated the use of early data to the server.
5573
 *
5574
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_STATUS_ACCEPTED if the client has
5575
 *                 indicated the use of early data and the server has accepted
5576
 *                 it.
5577
 *
5578
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA_STATUS_REJECTED if the client has
5579
 *                 indicated the use of early data but the server has rejected
5580
 *                 it. In this situation, the client may want to re-send the
5581
 *                 early data it may have tried to send by calling
5582
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_write_early_data() as ordinary post-handshake
5583
 *                 application data by calling mbedtls_ssl_write().
5584
 *
5585
 */
5586
int mbedtls_ssl_get_early_data_status(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
5587
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_CLI_C */
5588
5589
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_EARLY_DATA */
5590
5591
/**
5592
 * \brief          Free referenced items in an SSL context and clear memory
5593
 *
5594
 * \param ssl      SSL context
5595
 */
5596
void mbedtls_ssl_free(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl);
5597
5598
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_CONTEXT_SERIALIZATION)
5599
/**
5600
 * \brief          Save an active connection as serialized data in a buffer.
5601
 *                 This allows the freeing or re-using of the SSL context
5602
 *                 while still picking up the connection later in a way that
5603
 *                 it entirely transparent to the peer.
5604
 *
5605
 * \see            mbedtls_ssl_context_load()
5606
 *
5607
 * \warning        The serialized data contains highly sensitive material,
5608
 *                 including the master secret from which the session's traffic
5609
 *                 keys are derived.
5610
 *
5611
 *                 The serialized data is not cryptographically protected.
5612
 *                 It is the responsibility of the user of the
5613
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_context_save() and
5614
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_context_load() APIs to ensure both its
5615
 *                 confidentiality and integrity while stored or transported.
5616
 *
5617
 *                 See the mbedtls_ssl_context_load() documentation for
5618
 *                 additional information.
5619
 *
5620
 * \note           The serialized data only contains the data that is
5621
 *                 necessary to resume the connection: negotiated protocol
5622
 *                 options, session identifier, keys, etc.
5623
 *                 Loading a saved SSL context does not restore settings and
5624
 *                 state related to how the application accesses the context,
5625
 *                 such as configured callback functions, user data, pending
5626
 *                 incoming or outgoing data, etc.
5627
 *
5628
 * \note           This feature is currently only available under certain
5629
 *                 conditions, see the documentation of the return value
5630
 *                 #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA for details.
5631
 *
5632
 * \note           When this function succeeds, it calls
5633
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_session_reset() on \p ssl which as a result is
5634
 *                 no longer associated with the connection that has been
5635
 *                 serialized. This avoids creating copies of the connection
5636
 *                 state. You're then free to either re-use the context
5637
 *                 structure for a different connection, or call
5638
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_free() on it. See the documentation of
5639
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_session_reset() for more details.
5640
 *
5641
 * \param ssl      The SSL context to save. On success, it is no longer
5642
 *                 associated with the connection that has been serialized.
5643
 * \param buf      The buffer to write the serialized data to. It must be a
5644
 *                 writeable buffer of at least \p buf_len bytes, or may be \c
5645
 *                 NULL if \p buf_len is \c 0.
5646
 * \param buf_len  The number of bytes available for writing in \p buf.
5647
 * \param olen     The size in bytes of the data that has been or would have
5648
 *                 been written. It must point to a valid \c size_t.
5649
 *
5650
 * \note           \p olen is updated to the correct value regardless of
5651
 *                 whether \p buf_len was large enough. This makes it possible
5652
 *                 to determine the necessary size by calling this function
5653
 *                 with \p buf set to \c NULL and \p buf_len to \c 0. However,
5654
 *                 the value of \p olen is only guaranteed to be correct when
5655
 *                 the function returns #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BUFFER_TOO_SMALL or
5656
 *                 \c 0. If the return value is different, then the value of
5657
 *                 \p olen is undefined.
5658
 *
5659
 * \return         \c 0 if successful.
5660
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BUFFER_TOO_SMALL if \p buf is too small.
5661
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ALLOC_FAILED if memory allocation failed
5662
 *                 while resetting the context.
5663
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA if a handshake is in
5664
 *                 progress, or there is pending data for reading or sending,
5665
 *                 or the connection does not use DTLS 1.2 with an AEAD
5666
 *                 ciphersuite, or renegotiation is enabled.
5667
 */
5668
int mbedtls_ssl_context_save(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
5669
                             unsigned char *buf,
5670
                             size_t buf_len,
5671
                             size_t *olen);
5672
5673
/**
5674
 * \brief          Load serialized connection data to an SSL context.
5675
 *
5676
 * \see            mbedtls_ssl_context_save()
5677
 *
5678
 * \warning        The same serialized data must never be loaded into more
5679
 *                 that one context. In order to ensure that, after
5680
 *                 successfully loading serialized data to an SSL context, you
5681
 *                 should immediately destroy or invalidate all copies of the
5682
 *                 serialized data that was loaded. Loading the same data in
5683
 *                 more than one context would cause severe security failures
5684
 *                 including but not limited to loss of confidentiality.
5685
 *
5686
 * \warning        The serialized data contains highly sensitive material,
5687
 *                 including the master secret from which the session's traffic
5688
 *                 keys are derived.
5689
 *
5690
 *                 The serialized data is not cryptographically protected.
5691
 *                 It is the responsibility of the user of the
5692
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_context_save() and
5693
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_context_load() APIs to ensure both its
5694
 *                 confidentiality and integrity while stored or transported.
5695
 *
5696
 *                 A breach of confidentiality could result in full compromise
5697
 *                 of the associated TLS session, including loss of
5698
 *                 confidentiality and integrity of past and future
5699
 *                 application data protected under that session.
5700
 *
5701
 *                 A breach of integrity may allow modification of the
5702
 *                 serialized data prior to restoration. As it represents
5703
 *                 trusted internal context, tampering could potentially result
5704
 *                 in arbitrary code execution or other severe compromise of
5705
 *                 the hosting process.
5706
 *
5707
 * \note           Before calling this function, the SSL context must be
5708
 *                 prepared in one of the two following ways. The first way is
5709
 *                 to take a context freshly initialised with
5710
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_init() and call mbedtls_ssl_setup() on it with
5711
 *                 the same ::mbedtls_ssl_config structure that was used in
5712
 *                 the original connection. The second way is to
5713
 *                 call mbedtls_ssl_session_reset() on a context that was
5714
 *                 previously prepared as above but used in the meantime.
5715
 *                 Either way, you must not use the context to perform a
5716
 *                 handshake between calling mbedtls_ssl_setup() or
5717
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_session_reset() and calling this function. You
5718
 *                 may however call other setter functions in that time frame
5719
 *                 as indicated in the note below.
5720
 *
5721
 * \note           Before or after calling this function successfully, you
5722
 *                 also need to configure some connection-specific callbacks
5723
 *                 and settings before you can use the connection again
5724
 *                 (unless they were already set before calling
5725
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_session_reset() and the values are suitable for
5726
 *                 the present connection). Specifically, you want to call
5727
 *                 at least mbedtls_ssl_set_bio(),
5728
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_set_timer_cb(), and
5729
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_set_user_data_n() or
5730
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_set_user_data_p() if they were set originally.
5731
 *                 All other SSL setter functions
5732
 *                 are not necessary to call, either because they're only used
5733
 *                 in handshakes, or because the setting is already saved. You
5734
 *                 might choose to call them anyway, for example in order to
5735
 *                 share code between the cases of establishing a new
5736
 *                 connection and the case of loading an already-established
5737
 *                 connection.
5738
 *
5739
 * \note           If you have new information about the path MTU, you want to
5740
 *                 call mbedtls_ssl_set_mtu() after calling this function, as
5741
 *                 otherwise this function would overwrite your
5742
 *                 newly-configured value with the value that was active when
5743
 *                 the context was saved.
5744
 *
5745
 * \note           When this function returns an error code, it calls
5746
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_free() on \p ssl. In this case, you need to
5747
 *                 prepare the context with the usual sequence starting with a
5748
 *                 call to mbedtls_ssl_init() if you want to use it again.
5749
 *
5750
 * \param ssl      The SSL context structure to be populated. It must have
5751
 *                 been prepared as described in the note above.
5752
 * \param buf      The buffer holding the serialized connection data. It must
5753
 *                 be a readable buffer of at least \p len bytes.
5754
 * \param len      The size of the serialized data in bytes.
5755
 *
5756
 * \return         \c 0 if successful.
5757
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_ALLOC_FAILED if memory allocation failed.
5758
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_VERSION_MISMATCH if the serialized data
5759
 *                 comes from a different Mbed TLS version or build.
5760
 * \return         #MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA if input data is invalid.
5761
 */
5762
int mbedtls_ssl_context_load(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
5763
                             const unsigned char *buf,
5764
                             size_t len);
5765
#endif /* MBEDTLS_SSL_CONTEXT_SERIALIZATION */
5766
5767
/**
5768
 * \brief          Initialize an SSL configuration context
5769
 *                 Just makes the context ready for
5770
 *                 mbedtls_ssl_config_defaults() or mbedtls_ssl_config_free().
5771
 *
5772
 * \note           You need to call mbedtls_ssl_config_defaults() unless you
5773
 *                 manually set all of the relevant fields yourself.
5774
 *
5775
 * \param conf     SSL configuration context
5776
 */
5777
void mbedtls_ssl_config_init(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf);
5778
5779
/**
5780
 * \brief          Load reasonable default SSL configuration values.
5781
 *                 (You need to call mbedtls_ssl_config_init() first.)
5782
 *
5783
 * \param conf     SSL configuration context
5784
 * \param endpoint MBEDTLS_SSL_IS_CLIENT or MBEDTLS_SSL_IS_SERVER
5785
 * \param transport MBEDTLS_SSL_TRANSPORT_STREAM for TLS, or
5786
 *                  MBEDTLS_SSL_TRANSPORT_DATAGRAM for DTLS
5787
 * \param preset   a MBEDTLS_SSL_PRESET_XXX value
5788
 *
5789
 * \note           See \c mbedtls_ssl_conf_transport() for notes on DTLS.
5790
 *
5791
 * \return         0 if successful, or
5792
 *                 MBEDTLS_ERR_XXX_ALLOC_FAILED on memory allocation error.
5793
 */
5794
int mbedtls_ssl_config_defaults(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf,
5795
                                int endpoint, int transport, int preset);
5796
5797
/**
5798
 * \brief          Free an SSL configuration context
5799
 *
5800
 * \param conf     SSL configuration context
5801
 */
5802
void mbedtls_ssl_config_free(mbedtls_ssl_config *conf);
5803
5804
/**
5805
 * \brief          Initialize SSL session structure
5806
 *
5807
 * \param session  SSL session
5808
 */
5809
void mbedtls_ssl_session_init(mbedtls_ssl_session *session);
5810
5811
/**
5812
 * \brief          Free referenced items in an SSL session including the
5813
 *                 peer certificate and clear memory
5814
 *
5815
 * \note           A session object can be freed even if the SSL context
5816
 *                 that was used to retrieve the session is still in use.
5817
 *
5818
 * \param session  SSL session
5819
 */
5820
void mbedtls_ssl_session_free(mbedtls_ssl_session *session);
5821
5822
/**
5823
 * \brief          TLS-PRF function for key derivation.
5824
 *
5825
 * \param prf      The tls_prf type function type to be used.
5826
 * \param secret   Secret for the key derivation function.
5827
 * \param slen     Length of the secret.
5828
 * \param label    String label for the key derivation function,
5829
 *                 terminated with null character.
5830
 * \param random   Random bytes.
5831
 * \param rlen     Length of the random bytes buffer.
5832
 * \param dstbuf   The buffer holding the derived key.
5833
 * \param dlen     Length of the output buffer.
5834
 *
5835
 * \return         0 on success. An SSL specific error on failure.
5836
 */
5837
int  mbedtls_ssl_tls_prf(const mbedtls_tls_prf_types prf,
5838
                         const unsigned char *secret, size_t slen,
5839
                         const char *label,
5840
                         const unsigned char *random, size_t rlen,
5841
                         unsigned char *dstbuf, size_t dlen);
5842
5843
#if defined(MBEDTLS_SSL_KEYING_MATERIAL_EXPORT)
5844
/* Maximum value for key_len in mbedtls_ssl_export_keying material. Depending on the TLS
5845
 * version and the negotiated ciphersuite, larger keys could in principle be exported,
5846
 * but for simplicity, we define one limit that works in all cases. TLS 1.3 with SHA256
5847
 * has the strictest limit: 255 blocks of SHA256 output, or 8160 bytes. */
5848
#define MBEDTLS_SSL_EXPORT_MAX_KEY_LEN 8160
5849
5850
/**
5851
 * \brief             TLS-Exporter to derive shared symmetric keys between server and client.
5852
 *
5853
 * \param ssl         SSL context from which to export keys. Must have finished the handshake.
5854
 * \param out         Output buffer of length at least key_len bytes.
5855
 * \param key_len     Length of the key to generate in bytes, must be at most
5856
 *                    MBEDTLS_SSL_EXPORT_MAX_KEY_LEN (8160).
5857
 * \param label       Label for which to generate the key of length label_len.
5858
 * \param label_len   Length of label in bytes. Must be at most 249 in TLS 1.3.
5859
 * \param context     Context of the key. Can be NULL if context_len or use_context is 0.
5860
 * \param context_len Length of context. Must be < 2^16 in TLS 1.2.
5861
 * \param use_context Indicates if a context should be used in deriving the key.
5862
 *
5863
 * \note TLS 1.2 makes a distinction between a 0-length context and no context.
5864
 *       This is why the use_context argument exists. TLS 1.3 does not make
5865
 *       this distinction. If use_context is 0 and TLS 1.3 is used, context and
5866
 *       context_len are ignored and a 0-length context is used.
5867
 *
5868
 * \return            0 on success.
5869
 * \return            MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_BAD_INPUT_DATA if the handshake is not yet completed.
5870
 * \return            An SSL-specific error on failure.
5871
 */
5872
int mbedtls_ssl_export_keying_material(mbedtls_ssl_context *ssl,
5873
                                       uint8_t *out, const size_t key_len,
5874
                                       const char *label, const size_t label_len,
5875
                                       const unsigned char *context, const size_t context_len,
5876
                                       const int use_context);
5877
#endif
5878
#ifdef __cplusplus
5879
}
5880
#endif
5881
5882
#endif /* ssl.h */